Revit MEP 2010

Imperial Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 59 . 60 . 62 . 64 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 102

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 . 114 . 119 . 128 . 142 . 146 . 149 . 151

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 . 177 . 183 . 193 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 214

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 284 . 289 . 294 . 299

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 315

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a CAD Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 . 338 . 348 . 353 . 364

Contents | vii

viii .

1 .Introduction In this tutorial. you learn how to create and set up an MEP project. Finally. You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files.

2 .

and plumbing fixtures. and piping. 3 .Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. such as duct. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. electrical. Add more detailed modelling elements. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. Add basic MEP elements. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. fixtures. such as mechanical equipment. electrical panels. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. Germany. and plumbing engineering workflows. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles.

Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you learn where the training files are located. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. You do not design entire systems. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. you can choose to save your work. So. These elements enhance the exercises you complete.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. For example. and sheets to document the project. to provide a richer and more finished design. as well as how to open and save them. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. In this exercise. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. views. annotations. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. Create schedules. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. For example. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. Contact your CAD manager for more information. and tags. such as templates and families. when you add ductwork. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. however. On the Contents tab. After completing each exercise. NOTE Depending on your installation. Metric file names have an _m suffix. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. However. When you install the training files as instructed. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. Create detail views. your Training folder may be in a different location. is located and accessed in the training files location. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. Metric: files for users working with metric units. templates. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. When you open a training file.

2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 8 If you have made changes. For Files of type. if you open settings. click ➤ Save As. select the folder in which to save the new file.rvt) is selected. 4 Click the training file name. and click Save. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. 3 In the right pane. and click Open. a list of file types displays. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes.rvt and make changes. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. scroll down. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. you are prompted to save the changes. the Open dialog displays. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. double-click Imperial or Metric. and you can open any supported file type. You may close the file with or without saving changes. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. For example. For File name. verify that Project Files (*. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. Accessing Training Files | 5 .rvt. and click the Training Files icon. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. enter the new file name.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu.

6 .

the door retains this relationship to the partition. In this case. If the length of the elevation is changed. drawings. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. 2D and 3D view. quantities. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. If you move the partition. and plans. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. the parameter is one of association or connection. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. the operation of the software is parametric. scope. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. You learn the terminology. In this case. the hierarchy of elements. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. schedules. In the Revit MEP model. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. and phases when you need it. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. and schedules required for a building project. sections. the floor or roof remains connected. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. As you work in drawing and schedule views. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. every drawing sheet. drawing sheets. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. hence. ■ ■ 7 . You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition.

They display in relevant views of the design. levels. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. For example. tags. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. tags. and reference planes are datum elements. sprinklers. and 2D detail components. ducts. boilers. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. For example. For example. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. For example. grids. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. dimensions. When you change something. and electrical panels. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. dimensions. For example. sinks. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. walls and ceilings are hosts. They help to describe or document the design. and electrical panels. Datum elements help to define project context. and keynotes are annotation elements. filled regions. sprinklers. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. sinks. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. boilers. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. ducts. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Examples include detail lines. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. For example.

and drawings of the design. The project file contains all information for the building design. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. views of the project. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. programming is not required. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. North .This implementation provides flexibility for designers. This information includes components used to design the model. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. Most often. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. and so forth). In Revit MEP. from geometry to construction data. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. or bottom of foundation. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. top of wall. elevation views. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. For example. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. you do nothing to establish these relationships. floors. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. and types. In other cases. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. first floor. By using a single project file. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. and ceilings. families. such as roofs. To place levels. Often. for example. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. section views. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. However. If you can draw. Project: In Revit MEP. you must be in a section or elevation view. schedules. you can explicitly control them.

but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. showing. For example. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Unlike system and standard component families. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. Type: Each family can have several types. A type can also be a style. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. such as a 30” X 42” title block. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. With a few clicks. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. identical use. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. For example.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. However. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). and wires. hiding. For example. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. each in-place family contains only a single type. and similar graphical representation. Then experiment with them. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. You can also display several project views at one time. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. pipes. A type can be a specific size of a family. or layer the views to see only the one on top. System families can be transferred between projects. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. System families include ducts. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types.

Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. To return the panel to the ribbon. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often.

.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . and settings. then select what you want to modify. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for.. When working on the Modify tab. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. project and system parameters. and CAD files. and for switching views. architect-specific tools. tools used for running analysis on the current design. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. tools used for editing existing elements. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. select the tool first. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. data and systems.

Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. provides requested information. provides access to common tools. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. displays frequently used tools. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. closes the application menu (double-click). when adding duct. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. For example. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. By default. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. To keep a panel expanded. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel.

select a template and create a new drawing... (Open) save the current drawing. such as Export and Publish. (Export) On the application menu.The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands. select a file to open.. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name. (Save As) export the current drawing. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to.. click. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .

(Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . family. provides views including Default 3D. family. but is not enabled by default. to. Camera. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. publish the current project. (Print) access product and license information. or template file.. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. annotation.. saves a current project. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. (Publish) print the current drawing. and Walkthrough.. To enable or disable a tool item. (Licensing) close the file. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down.. click. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. or template file. annotation. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar.On the application menu.

To show the Status Bar again. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. In addition. To hide the Status Bar. This displays the command history in a list. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. Clear the Status Bar check mark. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. check the Status Bar. When you are highlighting an element or component. When you are using a command. or the Family Editor. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. Modify. However. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. repeat the command. workshared components. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode.To undo or redo a series of operations. displaying the same information. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. Group. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Clipboard. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. when you switch to another editing mode. Starting with the most recent command. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do.

Place a Wall. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. To change existing elements to a different type. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. click (Modify). select one or more elements of the same category. for example.To cancel or exit the current command. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. When you place an element in a drawing. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. On the Quick Access toolbar.

you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . 1 Click ➤ Open. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i.rvt. Zoom the view In the tutorials. There are several ways to access zoom options. click Training Files. After you are familiar with these tasks. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. For example. In the following steps. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project.

4 Click Zoom Out (2x). the view zooms in on the selected area. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. In the drawing area. 9 To display SteeringWheels. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. on the Navigation bar. If you do not have a wheel mouse. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. NOTE As you zoom in and out. When you release the mouse button. this is referred to as a crossing selection. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. 6 Click in the drawing area. To modify or add snap increments. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. click . Modifying the View | 19 . Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps.

20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. As you move the mouse. To define settings for SteeringWheels. ➤ Options. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. and then using the Zoom tool again. and click tin the Options dialog. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. moving the wheel to the desired location. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. press ESC. 14 To exit the wheel. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. Click and drag to orbit the design. click the SteeringWheels tab.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. For more information about SteeringWheels. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button.

After you are familiar with these tasks. Small blue dots.HVAC Plan . bottoms. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . Similar controls. called drag controls. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area.Design. display along the ends. These are the drag controls. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. referred to as shape handles. and open Level 2 . Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. as shown. and select the duct. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise.Design ➤ Floor Plans. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. When drawing or modifying an MEP design. 2 Enter ZR. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view.

you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. 4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. on the Standard toolbar. or press CTRL+Z. 6 On the Undo menu. All changes you make to a project are tracked. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. click the Undo command. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. select the first item in the list. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action.3 Click and drag the bottom control. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. In this example. Move.

such as Move and Copy. 10 Move the cursor to the right. The duct is moved to the new position. click to specify the starting position. as shown. 11 With the duct already selected. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . you want to move the duct. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. and click again to specify the ending position. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. In this case. After selecting the element to move. and drag it to the left as shown. for example. require 2 clicks to complete the command. Some commands.8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move.

under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical .End a command Some commands. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. 13 To end a command. Select Mechanical . Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command.Supply. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. For example. Press ESC twice. Click OK.Return. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. 14 Enter VG. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . such as the Modify Ducts command. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct.

17 Close the file without saving your changes. Performing Common Tasks | 25 .

26 .

A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. the default building levels and standard views. In that case. system families. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. New projects inherit all the families. you learn how to start a project from a template. under Create new. use copy/monitor. Finally. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. You can choose from several templates. 27 . 2 In the New Project dialog.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. such as ducts and pipes. and geometry from the starting template. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. link files. and click Open. and open Imperial ➤ Templates. select Project. 5 In the New Project dialog. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. such as coordination review and interference checking. click Browse. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. You can either select a template from the template library. under Template file. and modify system settings. settings. such as the default project units and settings. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. click Training files. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. 6 Click OK. 4 Select the i_Tutorial-Default.rte template. and loadable families. create and manage views. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it.

rte template and click Open. review the construction materials listed. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. Click Cancel. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. 10 Using the same method. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. click Edit. and select the Systems-Default_Imperial. click (Browse). you can select it now. and open North. under Energy Analysis. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. select Project template. For example. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. for City. For Location. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. ■ For Building Construction. 8 In the drawing area. When you select the material. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters.7 In the Project Browser. create another new project using the Construction template. select School or University. ■ ■ Under Create new. for Energy Data. In the Choose Template dialog. (Browse). select Level 1. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). click Browse. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Click OK. If you want to use a template other than the default. navigate to Imperial Templates. Click OK twice. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. select Manchester. NH.

Creating an MEP Project | 29 . Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. click Wiring. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. 4 1/2". select Views. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 24 In the right pane. 25 In the left pane. and 12 1/2". 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark.rfa and click Open. 23 In the left pane. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. power distribution systems. and 5 1/2". clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. for 3/4". plumbing. 27 Click OK. 4 1/2". 10 1/2". wiring. and demand factors for electrical systems. 11 1/2". Holding CTRL. For Categories. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. under Duct Settings. 33 Click OK. under Duct Settings. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. piping. click Round. select Identity Data. 26 In the right pane. 22 In the right pane. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines.rfa and I_Long Wire Tick Mark. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. select I_Hook Wire Tick Mark. and fire protection systems. click Sizes. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. click Rectangular. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. under Pipe Settings. ensure that Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. for 3 1/2". After standard settings have been established for an organization. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. Click OK twice. for 3 1/2". 5 1/2".

You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. From the Positioning list. under Template file. For Then by.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. Select Imperial\Arch Link Model_i. For Sort by. 5 Click OK. Notice that the file is saved as a template. Select Ascending Click OK twice. In addition. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. select Project. 2 In the New Project dialog.Origin to Origin. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. select Associated Level. select Sub-Discipline. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. click Training. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. select View Name. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . select Family and Type. Click Open. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. click Browse. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. Linking Projects In this exercise. To enable this coordination. under Create new. 38 Close the file. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by.rvt. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. and groups that are contained in a project. families. You need to create the MEP model for the project. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. sheets. 4 In the New Project dialog. select Auto . For Then by. select Type/Discipline and click Edit.

The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 8 If necessary, reposition elevations in the plan view as shown.

Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area, select the linked architectural model. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 11 In the Type Properties dialog, under Constraints, select Room Bounding. 12 Click OK. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North - Mech. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels.

Linking Projects | 31

16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 17 On the Options Bar, click Plan View types. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog, verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 19 On the left side of the view, click the level line for 03- Floor. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value.

24 Enter 12 and press ENTER. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2.

32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model, and when the monitored elements are not synchronized, warnings notify you of any violations. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed, a copied monitored element in the host project has changed, or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. Using the Copy/Monitor tool, you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements, which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. After copying, appears above the copied elements, indicating that a relationship is established, and that the copied elements are monitored. If you modify a monitored element, a warning message displays, indicating that an element has changed. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. 27 In the drawing area, highlight the linked model, and click to select the linked model. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. 29 In the drawing area, click the MEP level line labeled Level 1, then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2, level 3, and the level 4. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab, click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click By Host View. 34 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab:

For Annotation Categories, select Custom.

Linking Projects | 33

■ ■ ■

Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Levels. Click OK.

36 Click OK.

Creating and Applying a View Template
In this exercise, you create a view template and apply it to your project template. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 2 In the New View Template dialog, for Name, enter Mechanical View and click OK. 3 In the View templates dialog, under View Properties, for V/G Overrides RVT Links, click Edit. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click Custom. 5 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 6 On the Model Categories tab:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Model Categories, select Custom. Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Parking, Planting, Roads, Site, and Topography. Click OK.

7 Click OK twice. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North - Mechanical and click Apply View Template.

34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

9 In the Apply View Template dialog, under View Templates, select Mechanical and click OK.

10 Close the file with or without saving your changes.

Modifying System Settings
In this exercise, you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects; they are not saved to project files or template files.

Modifying General System Options
In this exercise, you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. These settings control the graphics, selection default options, notification preferences, journal cleanup options, and your username when using worksharing. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab. 3 Under Colors, select Invert background color, and click OK. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project.

5 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.rte. 7 Click OK. Notice that the drawing area is black. 8 Click ➤ Options.

9 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab.

Modifying System Settings | 35

10 Under Colors, click the value for Selection color. 11 In the Color dialog, select yellow, and click OK. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. When an error occurs, the elements causing the error display using this color. 12 Click the General tab. 13 Under Notifications, specify the following options:
■ ■

For Save reminder interval, select One hour. For Tooltip assistance, select None.

14 Click OK. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Select the wall.

Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. However, the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. 21 Close the file without saving it.

Specifying File Locations
In this exercise, you specify default file locations. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files, including your default project template, family template files, and family libraries. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the File Locations tab. 3 Under Default template file, click Browse.

36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template.

TIP To view a template, you can start a new project with that template. Click and click Browse to select a template. 4 Click Cancel. 5 Under Default path for user files, click Browse.

➤ New ➤ Project,

6 In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the folder to save your files to by default, and click Open. 7 In the Options dialog, under Default path for family template files, click Browse. This path is set automatically during the installation process. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. However, there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path, such as in a large, centralized, MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 8 Click Cancel. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog, click Places. 10 In the Places dialog, note the list of library names. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. You can modify the existing library names and path, and you can create new libraries. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open, Save, Load, and Import dialogs.

When you are opening, saving, or loading a Revit MEP file, you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration, notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.

Specifying File Locations | 37

and click Open. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. 15 Under Library Name. click (Add Value). 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. and Import dialogs. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. templates. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. ➤ Open. or families. Save.11 In the Places dialog. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. click the My Library icon. and click (Browse). click My Library. Load. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK twice. and change the name to My Library. and select it as the library path. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects .

9 In the text editor. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. (Remove Value) to delete the library. 14 Click in the drawing area. 19 Click Cancel. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 23 Click 24 Click OK. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. 11 In the Options dialog. select Ignore words in uppercase. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. 27 Click OK. such as bump maps. 2 In the Options dialog. click Places. 22 Select My Library. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 3 Under Settings. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. If you work in a large office. 5 In the text editor. 12 Create a new project using the default template. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. click the Spelling tab. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 20 Click ➤ Options. This path is determined during installation. 21 On the File Locations tab. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. If you want to relocate this path. custom color files. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. view the current path. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. click Edit. and decal image files.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. click OK. specify the new location here. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. click Edit. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library.

click Restore Defaults. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it.rte. you modify snap increments. you modify snap settings. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. under Dimension Snaps. 18 Click ➤ Options. 21 Under Personal dictionary. 2 In the New Project dialog. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. click Browse. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. 24 In the Options dialog. click Close. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. click Training Files. click the Spelling tab. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. 23 In the text editor. 6 In the Snaps dialog. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area.. In this exercise. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. click Edit. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. under Template file. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . click OK. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4’ . delete sheetmtl-CU. 4 In the New Project dialog. You can turn snap settings on and off. click File menu ➤ Save. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. and enter 1 .17 In the Spelling dialog. 25 Close the file without saving it. click OK. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 20 Under Settings. and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default. work with snapping turned off. 22 In the text editor. As you zoom in and out within a view. 19 In the Options dialog. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis.

If it does not. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 4’ increments. 10 On the Options Bar. enter SM. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. If you do not have a wheel button. For example. and move the cursor to the right. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1’. deselect Chain. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. such as ZO to zoom out. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. use the wheel button on your mouse. zoom out until it does so. TIP To zoom while sketching. 8 In the Snaps dialog. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. click OK. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys.7 Under Object Snaps. This is the increment that you added previously. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. While sketching. snapping reverts to the system default settings.

21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint.14 Click to set the wall endpoint. 25 Click OK. it will snap to the endpoints. and delete the value 1’ . Do not set the wall end point. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. If you move the cursor along the wall. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. with or without saving it. and move the cursor to the right. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. the midpoint. and the wall edges. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall.. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. 22 Move the cursor downward. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. 19 Enter SM. Notice that snapping is once again active. and specify the wall endpoint. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. 26 Close the file.

You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system. 43 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems.Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial.

44 .

NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. By following the recommended workflow.autodesk. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. you first plan the system. After applying a color scheme to the zones. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. As you create the mechanical system. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. you can choose to save your work.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. If the tutorial training files are not present. At the end of the tutorial. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. you first configure the linked architectural model. After finishing each exercise. water source heat pump (WSHP). duct system and a hydronic piping system. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. In this lesson. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. However. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. In this exercise. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. 45 . and then you create a plenum level. you design a mechanical system for an office building. This system consists of a cooling tower. methodology. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. you will understand the process. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. go to http://www.

1 In the Project Browser. These components are defined in the architectural training file. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. and after the linked model highlights.Space Plan is highlighted.rvt. not in the MEP training file. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_i. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. In this section. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. click Training Files. click to select it. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . you add a level for plenums. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. select Room Bounding. ceilings. and click OK. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . roof. NOTE When working with a linked file. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. under Constraints. Next. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. indicating that it’s the active view.

and click OK. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. Because you have not yet specified the view classification or sub-discipline properties. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. and double-click West .MEP. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . and in the Plan View Types dialog. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). those categories in the Project Browser are listed as question marks. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. For Offset. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. 16 Press Esc. and enter Level 2 Plenum. offset by the Offset value (8' 0" ) above level 2. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Preparing Spaces | 47 . click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). 9 On the Draw panel. enter 8'.6 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. verify that only Floor Plan is selected. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. Click Plan View Types. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. The new level is placed.

48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and then place spaces in various types of areas. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. select Design. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. For Sub-Discipline.Plenum. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. Under Identity Data. you place spaces in areas of the building model. for View Range. select MEP . click Edit. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. For Cut plane. select Level Above (Level 3). In this exercise. right-click Level 2 Plenum. Under View Depth. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. For View Classification. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. verify that 1/8" = 1'-0" is selected. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. In this exercise. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. and click Properties. In the next exercise. 20 In the Project Browser. for Default View Template. for Top.Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. ■ Click OK twice. for View Scale. However. select Plenum Plan. you can choose to save your work. Under Extents. right-click Level 2 Plenum.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. and for Offset. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. NOTE After finishing each exercise. enter an Offset of 1' 0". and click Apply Default View Template. enter 0. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. for Level.

■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . indicating that it’s the active view. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. and ceilings). You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. select Horizontal.Space Plan is highlighted.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. For Offset. In the left pane of the Open dialog. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_i. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool.rvt. For (Tag Location). 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. Placing Spaces | 49 . select New. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. walls. enter 0. select Level 2 Plenum. For Upper Limit. For Space. click Training Files. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected.

8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 14 In the drawing area. For Name. enter 219. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. 9 Select the space. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. ensuring coordination between the files. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . enter Library. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . for Number.7 Click to place the space.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. Click OK.

Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. select Level 3. Placing Spaces | 51 . change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 20 Click in the Library to place the space. and then click Modify. 18 Select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. For Upper Limit. For Offset. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 21 Using the method learned previously. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. enter 0.

Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. under Energy Analysis. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you place a space in a large corridor area. and then split the space using a space separation line. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. 23 Click OK.22 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing.

3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_i. click Training Files. select Level 3.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. and then press Esc. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Upper Limit. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . enter 0. 5 On the Options Bar.Space Plan is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view. and for Offset.

click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. change the space number to 216A. 11 Close the schedule view. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. double-click the space name. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. 9 In the floor plan. In the schedule. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. as shown. If you had modified the name and number in the schedule view instead. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. enter Corridor. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. which was numbered 219Q. the plan view would have updated with the changes. and scroll to the newly placed space. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and notice that the schedule updates with the changes. 10 Using the same method.7 In the Project Browser. and press Enter.

The new space is numbered correctly (216B). Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . 16 Using the method learned previously. 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. 18 Close the file with or without saving it. place a space in the lower area of the split space.15 Press Esc twice.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_i.rvt. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section.Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. you place a space in a chase. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Space Plan is highlighted. click Training Files. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. If necessary. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty). and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. indicating that it’s the active view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .

and then click OK. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. expand Spaces. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. for Upper Limit. enter 225PC. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . For Limit Offset. For Offset. For Number. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. for Name. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. right-click. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. select the space. enter Chase. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. and click Element Properties.4 Press Esc. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. select Level 3. enter 4'. for Upper Limit. click in the chase area to place the space. 12 Click in the section view. select Interior and Reference. On the Options Bar. In the plan view. select Roof Level. 6 Enter VG. Under Identity Data. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. 10 In the plan view. enter 0.

Space Plan.Bounding elements (such as walls. floors. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. 15 Press Esc. under Loaded Tags. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . All spaces in the view are tagged. 17 Type ZF. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. ceilings. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. and maximize the view. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. In the next exercises. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. and click OK. select Space Tag With Volume.

You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. In this exercise. which removes the space from the Default zone. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog.rvt. click View ➤ Zones. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. 1 In the Project Browser. To display space reference lines. it is automatically added to the Default zone.Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. click Reference. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. ) or Viewing Zones in the System Browser | 59 . Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan.Zoning is highlighted. click Training Files. After a space is placed in an area. The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_i. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. under Spaces. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces.

7 Close the file with or without saving it. click Reference. Instruction 221. double-click 121 Cafeteria. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_i. and modify the zone properties. As you do this. 4 In the drawing area. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. indicating that the space is occupiable. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise.Zoning is highlighted. you assign spaces to a zone. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. and verify the zones in the System Browser.5 In the System Browser. select Occupiable. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. under Spaces. click Training Files. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. and click Finish Editing Zone. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. The graphic in the System Browser updates. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone.rvt. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. and Electrical 220 spaces. In the left pane of the Open dialog. NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. The Zone tool is active. To display space reference lines. you assign spaces to zones in the building. Next. under Energy Analysis. the Edit Zone tab displays. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. and click OK. indicating that it’s the active view. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. select Computer Lab 222. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. and a new zone is created. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . you can add or remove a space from the zone. Using the Edit Zone tab.

you need to activate the zone visibility. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). To view the zone in the drawing area. 5 With the drawing area active. Instruction.In the System Browser. Expand HVAC Zones. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. Click OK. type VG. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . select HVAC Zones. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone.

3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. under Spaces. and verify the zone in the System Browser. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. 9 In the System Browser. indicating that it’s the active view.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone.Zoning. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. click Finish Editing Zone.West . The new zone name displays in the System Browser. In this exercise. and click OK. 10 On the Edit Zone tab. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_i. To display space reference lines. expand 2 . and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. 11 Close the System Browser. click Reference. You activated zone visibility in the views. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. enter 2 .Zoning is highlighted. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows.rvt. under Identity Data. for Name. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. click Training Files. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser.Area B. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .TIP After you finish editing the zone. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building.West . you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog.

Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 . 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. zoom out.5 Click in the Level 1 . 9 With the Add Space tool active. 6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone. Select Attached End. 10 Click Finish Editing Zone. and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired.Zoning view. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. click in the Level 2 .Zoning view to activate it.Zoning view. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone. 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. Verify that the distance is 1/2". Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 .Zoning floor plan. 15 Press Esc. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. 8 In the Level 1 .

space. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_i. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. on the ViewCube. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. Front. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser.rvt. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . The new zone name displays in the System Browser. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. and zone information.East. enter Lounge . double-click Level 1 . 19 Close the file with or without saving it. and click OK. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you verify the building. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values.Zoning view. click Training Files. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed.Zoning to make it the active view. for Name Value. click the corner where the Top. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. In this exercise. double-click the zone tag.

4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). verify that Wireframe is selected. Click (Highlight). click (Isolate). Using the Highlight tool. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. you isolate the space. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. ■ TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Lounge. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. With 109 Lounge selected. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. and select 109 Lounge. Next. ■ Working with the Analytical Model | 65 .

and click OK. ■ ■ ■ Next. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. select 109 Lounge. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). and then click OK. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space.■ On the Details tab. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. and then click OK. and in the People dialog. scroll down in the left pane. For Construction Type. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Below the list of spaces and zones. the space information displays for the selected space. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. For People. click . click . verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. select Lounge/Recreation. Next. 6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. All spaces in the zone display in isolation. For Electrical Loads. select 1_South_Lounge. verify that <Building> is selected. click .

verify that 70. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. 12 Using the methods learned previously. Next. heating air temperature. roofs. Below the list of spaces and zones. This indicates the heating set point. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine.00 °F : N/A is specified. and air changes per hour. cooling air temperature. For Heating Information. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. verify that 74. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. This indicates the outdoor air per person. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. outdoor air per area. NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. and dehumidification set point.00 °F : 54. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. and other room-bounding components. click (Shading).00 °F : N/A is specified. For Cooling Information. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. floors. verify that <Building> is selected. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. This indicates the cooling set point. the zone information displays for the selected zone. and humidification set point.Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Lounge.00 °F : 90.

select Plenum. Because this is an unoccupied space.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. enter 212P. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. open MEP . for Number. select Level 3. Under Energy Analysis. For Name. Under Energy Analysis. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 15 In the Project Browser. enter 0. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. Modify space properties 19 Select the space. For Offset. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. Click OK. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum).Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. select Plenum. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. click Cancel.

and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. On the Place tab. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. enter 03101. For Postal Code. In this exercise. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. you verified building. for City. select School or University. space. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. and verify that the space has replaced the void. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. verify that Manchester. and select space Plenum 212P. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. NH. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Edit. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. double-click Level 2 . and zone information. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. For Location. click in the Value field. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_i.rvt. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building.22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . under Energy Analysis. is selected.Space Plan. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. for Energy Data. 26 Close the file with or without saving it.

first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. enter 150 Btu/h. ■ On the Weather tab. and click OK. verify that 1' 0" is specified. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. verify that New Construction is selected. For Latent. select Heated and cooled. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. Select Area per person. both. a cooling load. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. for Building Service.Audio Visual. select Specified. for Values. 8 In the drawing area. and click Element Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. click in the Value column. For Sliver Space Tolerance. For Ground Plane. ft. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . If. or neither. and enter 50 sq. For Project Phase. For Sensible. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. this option adjusts the times automatically. select Specified. for Values. ■ In the Type Properties dialog. For Condition Type. verify that Level 1 is selected. under Volume Computations. For Export Complexity. and click OK. Under Heat Gain (per Person). right-click. select Library . verify that <Building> is specified. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. Click OK twice. and click OK. verify that Occupiable is selected. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. and then click . you need to select this option. In order to select a space. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load.When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. For Building Construction. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. select space Library 219. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). click Edit. For People. For Space Type. enter 200 Btu/h.

select Actual. click Calculate. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. You have verified the building information. verify that Heating Set Point is 70°F . for Values. There should be no warnings displayed. for Values. and click to learn the cause for the warning. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. Select the space associated with the warning. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. verify that School or University is selected. verify that <Building> is specified. is specified. For Building Construction. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. Click OK twice. click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. For Electrical Loads. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. NH. and can be modified here. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. Under Power. click Information). 12 Click the Details tab. select Actual. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. For Building Service. click Edit. select 219 Library. Next. For Location. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. You should correct the space error in the building model. and under Heating Information. verify that Manchester. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog).■ ■ ■ Click OK. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . and click OK. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog.

TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_i. and a loads report displays. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes.Space Plan.rvt.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. select HVAC Zones. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. For Color Scheme. 3 In the drawing area. 19 In the drawing area. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. or zone information. In this exercise. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. click Training Files. space. select 219 Library. 15 Review the loads report for project. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. 21 Click OK. 16 After you review the loads report. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. click to the right of the building to place the legend. and zone information for the building model. or make any changes to the model. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. weather. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . space. indicating that it’s the active view. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library.After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. 17 In the loads report. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . under Energy Analysis. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. Click OK.

and click OK. The new scheme displays in the view. You want a scheme that allows for a greater tonnage range. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . in 1-ton increments.5 Zoom in to the legend. select the color scheme legend. Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. under Schemes. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. select Tonnage Range. Notice that the cooling load is based on tonnage value.

9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. 11 Using the method learned previously.

For Name. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. Select Schedule building components. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_i.12 Close the file with or without saving it. Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. for Select available fields from. you create a schedule for the supply air system project.rvt. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. more category options are available. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system.Space Fill is the active view. For Phase. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. In the next exercise. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. In this exercise. select Spaces. Click OK. select New Construction. select Spaces. enter Space Airflow Schedule. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities.

select Air Flow. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. enter Airflow Delta. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously.■ Under Available fields. enter . Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ For Test. Select Ascending. select Number. and then click Conditional Format. for Formula. For Then by. select HVAC. For Fields. and then select Hidden field. In the Schedule Properties dialog. In the Calculated Value dialog. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. select Calculated Supply Airflow. Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. select Not Between. For Formula. Click OK. select Level. In the Fields dialog. click (Browse). Header. and Blank line. Select Formula. For Discipline. and click OK. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . ■ Click Calculated Value. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. For Type. select Level. and then click . select Airflow Delta.

right-click to access schedule properties.■ ■ ■ For Value. In later exercises. and click OK. select red. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. Click OK twice. In the Color dialog. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . enter -25 CFM and 25 CFM. ■ The schedule displays. Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. In this exercise. In the next lesson. a view opens that contains the selected space. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. verify that Show is highlighted. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -25 to 25 CFM. click the color swatch. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. Under Conditions to Use. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. For Background Color.

78 .

you will create supply air systems. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. you size ductwork and validate your air system design. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. Then. In this lesson. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. After completing the air systems lesson. 79 . and work with the airflow schedule. you modify air terminal parameters. As you place the air terminals. After system creation.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise.

the space crossing lines display. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. When you highlight a space using the cursor. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . click Training Files. Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and scroll to space 223. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_i. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule.rvt. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. 3 In the ceiling view. indicating that it’s the active view.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well.

Hosted : 24"x24" Face 8" Neck . If the host element is modified or moved. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . Also. 13 On the Options Bar. and then press Esc to end the command. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. type 12. verify that Constrain is cleared. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. and press Enter. and then select both Copy and Multiple.Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. the hosted elements are updated as well.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. as shown. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. 9 On the Placement panel. 17 Move the cursor down. click Place on Face.Hosted from the Type Selector drop-down. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. 8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. 15 On the Options Bar. for Flow. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. select the diffuser. and select Supply Diffuser . 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. and press Enter. The schedule updates with the new flow data.Rectangular Face Round Neck . 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. enter 425 CFM. which in this case is the ceiling grid. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command.

82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 22 In the drawing area. as shown. and click Open. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range.rfa. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. navigate to Training\Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\Diffuser Tag. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. Next. click Place on Face. and then press Esc. 24 In the Open dialog. 28 On the Placement tab. select one of the diffusers. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. 21 On the Options Bar. click Yes. 27 Select Return Diffuser . As you place the return diffusers.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. 25 In the drawing area. 29 Place 2 diffusers. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 425 CFM. clear Leader.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.

and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. 32 In the Project Browser. and click to select the lines. click Yes. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. 31 In the alert dialog. select one of the return diffusers. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. Level. as shown. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Strong Reference. under Other. for Reference. and click OK.

37 In the Family Already Exists dialog, click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan, zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 40 In the drawing area, select the vertical grid line as shown.

41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown, and then select the top edge of the diffuser.

43 Using the same method, align the other return diffuser, as shown, and then press Esc twice.

44 While pressing Ctrl, select both return diffusers, and on the Options Bar, for Flow, enter 650 CFM310 CFM, and press Enter. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left, right-click, and click Element Properties. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, clear LeftArrow, and click OK.

84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

47 Using the same method, clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser.

48 Close the file with or without saving it.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals
In this exercise, you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. As you place the air terminals, you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_i.rvt.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85

Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser, expand HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design to make it the active view. 2 On the View Control Bar, for Scale, click 1/8" = 1'-0". 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115, at the lower left corner of the building. When you highlight a space using the cursor, the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule, and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 8 In the Type Selector, select Supply Diffuser - Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 - 8 Neck. 9 On the Options Bar, verify that Tag on Placement is selected. 10 In the drawing area, click to place the air terminal in the space as shown, and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. Also, the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing, the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. As a result, your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. 11 Select the diffuser, and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Modify the diffuser properties:

In the Instance Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Offset, enter 8'. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level, the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. Under Mechanical - Airflow, for Flow, enter 360 CFM. Click OK.

■ ■

86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

13 With the diffuser still selected, click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser, move the cursor down, type 20', and then press Enter. 15 Press Esc. By copying the diffuser, you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag.

16 Using the same method, select both air terminals and copy them 14' to the right.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87

Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 18 On the Options Bar, clear Leader. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers, and then press Esc. Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type, type, mark, and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it, and then right-click in the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Other, for Embedded Schedule, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

Select Embedded Schedule. For Category, select Air Terminals, and then click Embedded Schedule Properties.

23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click System Type, Type, Mark, and Flow. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Mark. 25 Click OK 3 times. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range, it is a negative value. Next, you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure.

88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. 26 Using the method learned previously, tile the windows. 27 In the schedule, under space 115, select SD 1-12-110. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule, for Flow, enter 450 CFM, and press Enter. 29 Using the same method, change the flow for SD 1-12-111 and 112 to 330 CFM. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project, because you are modifying the digital database of building information. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89

Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule, and maximize Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design. 31 In the drawing area, select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. As you highlight the zone, pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone, as shown.

32 Open the Instance Properties dialog, and under Energy Analysis, verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 33807 Btu/h and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 3.9 ton (approximately 1.5 times the heating load). 33 Click OK. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 35 In the Type Selector, select WSHP - Horizontal - High Efficiency - 2-5 Tons - Left Return - Right Discharge : 4 Tons. 36 In the drawing area, zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.

90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

For the start point.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. ■ ■ For the end point. click to select the midpoint of the bottom of the WSHP. enter 9' 0"2750. click the Level 1 line. 44 Zoom in to space 115. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. Verify that the measured distance is 9'. and verify the height of the WSHP: ■ ■ Click Modify tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Measure Between Two References. and click OK. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Constraints ➤ Offset.

indicating that it’s the active view. You then create the logical connection between the system components.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. verify that Design ➤ HVAC .Design is highlighted. However. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. right-click the title. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. including energy analysis. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_i. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. and click View ➤ Systems. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. click Training Files.Press Esc. When you highlight a space. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. After creating the logical connection.rvt. the space crossing lines display. In this exercise. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.HVAC Plan .

IMPORTANT In the System Browser. and Flow value. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 12 In the System Browser. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. 15 Click Cancel. Note that the Flow value (1700 CFM) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. On the Options Bar. 6 Keep the System Browser open. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. 11 In the drawing area. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. the number of elements is updated. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. As you add diffusers to systems. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. System Name. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. review the Number of Elements. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. Connect Into. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser.

you also use the System Browser to validate systems. 18 Click OK. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 25 Click OK. access system properties to see that the flow value (2125 CFM) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. In this exercise. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. for Mark. and the system connects them. 26 Click Finish Editing System. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. which updates the name in the System Browser. Rename the system Next. under Mechanical. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. the air terminals are the children. for System Name. under Identity Data. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. In this exercise. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. 22 Click OK. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 27 Close the file with or without saving it.17 Using the method learned previously.

A Generate Layout tab displays. select the upper left diffuser. When you highlight a space using the cursor. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. the space crossing lines display. and display solution 1. 4 In the drawing area.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select Network. the Network type provides several solutions. Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. In this case. indicating that it’s the active view.HVAC Plan. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_i. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. for Solution Type. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). which provides various layout tools. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 5 On the Options Bar. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. Also.rvt. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles.Design is highlighted.

Round. click Modify. 9 On the Generate Layout panel. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . For Offset. For Offset. click Settings. Select Branch. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. as shown. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. For Maximum Flex Duct Length. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. you’ll get an error in a later step. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers.7 On the Options Bar. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. enter 3'. For Duct Type. and use the drag control to drag it just to the left of the lighting fixtures. enter 9' 10 1/2". enter 9' 10 1/2". For Flex Duct Type. For Duct Type. Click OK.

Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. For example. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. Either relocate the system components. or offset elevations are incorrect. select a different layout solution. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. as is the elbow itself.11 Click Finish Layout. or manually modify the duct.

you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. but not all values are used in this view.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. under Graphics. and click to select it. select Duct Color Fill . 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. and then click OK. highlight a segment of the main duct. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. Using a flow-based color scheme. for Values Displayed. The first time you press Tab. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. a disconnection exists. select By View. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. for Color Scheme. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend.Flow. fittings. Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. thus it is not part of the system. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. and click OK. If the entire network does not highlight. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. Usually. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. and equipment.

select one of the diffusers in the system. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. and press Enter. 20 In the drawing area. for Schemes. select Duct Color Fill .Velocity. and then press Esc to clear the selection. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . select the WSHP. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. note the Air Flow value (2125 CFM).The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. select the color scheme legend. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. 26 Click OK.Airflow. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. decrease the flow value by 100 CFM. and click OK. and on the Options Bar. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. for Flow. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. 21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. under Mechanical .

and select 16".08 in-wg/100ft. for Branch Sizing. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and enter . highlight a segment of the duct. Select Only.Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. and drag it to the right. Select the upper segment of main duct. select Calculated Size Only. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. The ductwork and fittings are updated. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. select Friction. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). and then click to select it. Click OK. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. Select Restrict Height. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. click Cancel. Under Constraints.

Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection).Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 101 . Use the information that displays (flow. 33 Move the cursor over the system components. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. so that you can modify the system design accordingly. and pressure loss. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). pressure. Using this tool. static pressure. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork.

NOTE As you inspect a system. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_i. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .rvt. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. 35 Click Finish. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. also known as the critical path.

and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Beveled Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. and click to specify the end of the main duct.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors). verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers. 6 Click midway between the 2 top light fixtures to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 .Design is highlighted. and click Draw Duct.HVAC Plan . 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. indicating that it’s the active view. and select the WSHP. 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel.Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser.

right-click the connector grip. 14 In the Project Browser. for Offset.3D MEP. Front. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. and click Draw Duct.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . select the top right diffuser. 11 On the Options Bar. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. click the corner where the Top. Click this corner Resulting view orientation 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. select 9' 10 1/2".8 Press Esc twice to end the command. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 15 On the ViewCube. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. NOTE When drawing duct. double-click MEP .

the color fill indicates the flow value. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. 19 In the drawing area. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. The ductwork is automatically created.16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. Also. 22 Using the same method. 18 Make the floor plan the active view. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. it is considered a closed loop. in space 115. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 .

106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . zoom in to the open end of the main duct. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. Branch ductwork in 3D Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. You can ignore the warning. 25 Press Esc. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. and select the top left diffuser. 24 Select the remaining diffusers.Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct.

33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. and then click Modify. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . 28 Select Rectangular Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. and click to select it. 30 Press Esc twice. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run.To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations.

under Mechanical . Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. and click OK. such as a plenum. for Flow. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct.Airflow. and then click OK. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select a segment of the main duct. under Constraints. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. clear Restrict Height. 108 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. 40 Using the same method. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate CFM value for the system.

including 2 base mounted pumps. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. In this lesson. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. and a cooling tower located on the roof.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. Then. 109 . Create return and supply piping systems. Automatically and manually lay out piping. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. additional water source heat pumps from level 1.

including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler.Level 3 mechanical piping system Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. on level 3 of the building model. you place mechanical equipment. click Training Files.rvt. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_i. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.

NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view.2-6 Tons . as shown. 7 On the Options Bar. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number.Design is highlighted.HVAC Plan .Left Return . verify that Wall faces is selected. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. in corridor 328.Right Discharge : 6 Ton from the Type Selector drop-down. 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing. 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component. indicating that it’s the active view.Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser. and select WSHP . and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building.Horizontal .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component.High Efficiency . 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel.

click the dimension.8 Click the corridor wall face. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. and click to place the dimension. as shown. 10 Select the WSHP. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and enter 2'. and in the Type Selector. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first.) 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 11 Press Enter and then press Esc. as shown. click the top edge of the WSHP. verify that the WSHP is still selected.

as shown. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. enter 9'. and click to place it in the mechanical room. enter 12 GPM.14 Click Modify. Under Mechanical. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. for Water Flow. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. Click OK. select the 2 WSHPs. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and select Condensing Boiler : 500 MBH from the Type Selector drop-down. for Offset. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints.

21 Click Modify. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. Create the logical connection between the system components. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. you create the return and supply piping systems. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Create pipes to physically connect the system components. including flow and pressure.

verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 5 In the System Browser. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window.Mech 330). and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . but without a corresponding system. indicating that it’s the active view. Creating a Piping System | 115 . 6 Expand the Unassigned folder.Design is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. analyses cannot be performed. and click View ➤ Piping. click Training Files.HVAC Plan .IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. right-click the Systems column heading.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .rvt. where it is easier to review the information. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_i. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. Unlike logical connections (systems). You can create pipes to connect system components.

It does not indicate a pipe layout path. 9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 12 In the drawing area. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. select the 2 WSHPs. Notice that on the Options Bar. for System Name.In the System Browser. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. As you assign equipment to systems. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. Assigning a system component to an existing system. Therefore. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. 10 On the Options Bar. This display indicates that the system is selected. select the boiler. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. the System Equipment is Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. and the Edit System tool is not active. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. while pressing Ctrl. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel.

18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. under Design ➤ HVAC . You have created the hydronic return system. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it. Creating a Piping System | 117 . 19 In the Project Browser. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. for System Name. and select the cooling tower.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 17 On the Options Bar. double-click Roof . 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties.13 Click Finish Editing System. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply.HVAC Plan . 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building.Design.

IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. In cooling mode. 26 Click Finish Editing System. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. and click Expand All. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. and bypasses the cooling tower. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. and click Select. 25 Select the boiler. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. select Connector 1 : Undefined : Round : 4'' : Cooling Water Supply In. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The hydronic supply system highlights in red. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. indicating the logical connection. 29 Right-click CHWS. 28 Using the same method. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. 23 Close the roof plan view. Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. and click OK. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children).22 In the Select Connector dialog. In heating mode. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). expand the Hydronic Return system category.

The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. and click Properties. and click Column Settings. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. You also manually modify the layout path as required. including the flow rate and size of the component. expand Piping. you can view several parameters. for Water Flow. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. and click OK. under Mechanical. and click OK. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. enter 18 GPM. 32 In the System Browser. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog.In the System Browser. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise.

and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors).Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .HVAC plan view range are highlighted. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_i. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. and click OK. select Mechanical Equipment.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). click Check None. then the Select a System dialog displays. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering.Design is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. 5 In the Filter dialog. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. When you draw a box to select components. indicating that it’s the active view. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout.rvt. the boiler. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. Notice that all components within the Level 3 . 9 In the Select a System dialog. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . 10 Click OK. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). select CHWR. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click to select it. you can place the cursor over a system component. press Tab to highlight the system.HVAC Plan . A system preview displays in red. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Mech 330).

structural beams. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. For Inset. click Settings. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. ■ ■ Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. enter 1' 6''. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. It does not reference the architecture.11 On the Options Bar. or architectural components. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. select Perimeter. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 10' 0''. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. verify that Solutions is selected. duct. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. 13 Click Cancel.

The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. 19 In the drawing area.16 Click Finish Layout. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. the flow for one WSHP is 18. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. and press Tab 3 times. With each Tab. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. 17 Optionally. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. and the flow for the other is 12. to display the path with thinner lines.

verify that the value for Flow is 30 GPM. notice that the Water Flow is 30 GPM. and access its instance properties.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (18 GPM + 12 GPM). and click OK. 22 Select the boiler. 24 Press Esc. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Mechanical. and click OK. 23 Under Mechanical. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

Logically. click Edit System. Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below.Design. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. you physically close the CHWR loop. On the Options Bar. 32 Click Finish Editing System. Next.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. 28 In the Project Browser. 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System.HVAC Plan . double-click Level 1 . the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs.Design ➤ Floor Plans. which propagates flow throughout the system. 27 On the System Tools panel. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. the Number of Elements is now 8.

the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). select a WSHP. as shown. Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. and click Cancel. 38 Using the same method. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. 35 Using the drag control. access its instance properties. under Mechanical. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. so the total flow of 125 GPM indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. note that the value for Flow is 95 GPM. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 125 GPM. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 95 GPM. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 30 GPM.34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe.

For Inset. select Perimeter 1 of 5. Click Settings. 41 Click OK. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .40 In the Select a System dialog. enter 1' 6''. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. enter 0''/12''. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. select CHWS. enter 9' 6'' for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. 45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. and then click OK. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. For Slope.

48 While pressing Ctrl. as shown. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 127 . (Both sections are at the same elevation. as shown. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). 46 Click Modify.) 49 Select the 4-way arrow control. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. In a later exercise. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. 47 In the drawing area.The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path.

To create the piping system. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . you: ■ ■ ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. Either relocate the system components. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop.50 Using the same method. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. 51 Click Finish Layout. or manually modify the pipe. or offset elevations are incorrect. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. select a different layout solution. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. Add piping to close the supply loop. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry.

and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_i. as shown. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation. double-click 3D HVAC Building. In the left pane of the Open dialog.NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design is highlighted. click Training Files. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser.HVAC Plan . 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. indicating that it’s the active view. As you work in the training file.Design ➤ 3D Views. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC . and the return pipes are magenta.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .rvt. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.

draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector. 7 In the plan view. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . as shown. select the section of piping.Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. 6 Press Delete.

10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. ■ Move the cursor up 4''. Click to specify the reference point. and press Esc to clear the selection. 9 In the 3D view. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . select the boiler.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. ■ Click to move the piping.

select the boiler. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. and the boiler is connected to the return piping. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. and the lower one is secondary. 11 In the Select Connector dialog. select the return pipe riser. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. and click Draw Pipe. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 2'' : Cold Water In. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. The connections are automatically created. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. 13 In the plan view. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). 12 In the 3D view. and click OK. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected.

■ ■ On the Options Bar. for Offset.In a plan view. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. and press Enter. enter 2'. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. enter 1' . and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. and you select 1 connector. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. ■ Move the cursor down. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . Add another 2' section of pipe to the right.7''.

Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. 18 Press Esc twice. select the primary base mounted pump. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. select Connector 2 : Undefined: Round: 3''. and select it. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. As you place piping runs that are close together. and click OK. 19 In the plan view. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. and the appropriate fittings are created. as shown.

28 Press Esc. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. and click Draw Pipe. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. right-click the bottom connector. and click to draw the pipe. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 . and click the minus symbol. 29 If necessary. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. 27 Move the cursor to the right. you select the tee fitting. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections.24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. and when the connector point displays. click to connect to the pump.

for Offset. 31 On the Options Bar. enter 4'. and click to create the pipe. and click Draw Pipe. 33 Press Esc. right-click the discharge connector. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. select the primary base mounted pump. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view.

3D view of parallel-connected base mounted pumps Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 . zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump. as shown. these pipe connections were created automatically. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector.Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. 35 Using the method learned previously.

enter 9' 6''.36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. and press Enter. and click Draw Pipe. right-click the bottom control on the tee. for Offset. and click to create the pipe. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . ■ ■ On the Options Bar. ■ Move the cursor down. type 1'.

right-click. Next. you validate the flow through the system.37 Click Modify. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. You now have a closed loop system. and click Element Properties. Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 .

When you create the pumps in parallel. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. In the Instance Properties dialog. which is rounded up to 63 GPM (1/2 of 125 GPM). for Cooling Water Flow. 48 In the plan view. the value is 0 GPM. and click OK. Connect the cooling tower Next. under Mechanical. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. 43 Press Esc. select the cooling tower. 46 Press Esc.39 In the Instance Properties dialog. as shown. 42 Click OK. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. 40 Click Cancel. and click Element Properties. under Mechanical. view the properties for the secondary pump. The flow is being propagated through the piping. right-click. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. notice that under Mechanical. notice that Flow is 125 GPM. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. 41 Using the same method. 44 In the 3D view.50 or 50% of the Flow. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. ■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is .

49 Press Esc.■ Lower pipe (outlet). Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system. NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 .

and is heated by the boiler. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 125 GPM. the water bypasses the cooling tower. select the cooling tower. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower. click Training Files. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode.rvt.50 In the 3D View. When the valve is open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_i. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and close the dialog. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Adding Valves In this exercise.

2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . The bypass valve is closed by default. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. indicating that it’s the active view. Adding Valves | 143 . verify that the Diameter value is 3''. 8 Press Esc twice.HVAC Plan .Design is highlighted. as shown. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. and select Ball Valve .Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Options Bar. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step.

12 Select Ball Valve . parallel to the previously placed valve. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . place another Ball Valve . 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower. 15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 14 Using the same method. Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.2-6 Inch Bypass : 4'' valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower.2-6 Inch : 4'' from the Type Selector drop-down.10 Press Esc.

you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. verify that Flow is 0 GPM.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). 20 Select the bypass valve. (This valve allows the water to flow through it. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode.2-6 Inch : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). under Mechanical. validate that the Flow value is 0 GPM. right-click. and select Ball Valve . Adding Valves | 145 . In heating mode. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower).Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. and click Element Properties. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. and click OK. and select Ball Valve . 18 In the Instance Properties dialog.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. 19 Using the same method. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler.

as shown. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .rvt. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 125 GPM. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. Sizing Pipe In this exercise.Design is highlighted. Initially. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . In the left pane of the Open dialog.22 Using the method you just learned. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 GPM. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 GPM.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_i.HVAC Plan .

click Pipe Color Fill . 8 Press Esc to clear the selection.Flow.4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. and click OK. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected. Sizing Pipe | 147 . This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and click OK.Size. for Schemes. select Pipe Color Fill . and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.

12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment).25 FT/100ft. and for Velocity. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select Larger of Connector and Calculated. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. Click OK. 13 Press Esc. and enter 2. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. for Branch Sizing. Under Constraints. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. enter 5 FPS. and click to select the branch. Select And. select Friction.

Using the System Inspector. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. Inspecting the System | 149 . Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . select a different layout solution. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. or offset elevations are incorrect. or manually modify the pipe. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. Either relocate the system components. click Training Files.rvt. pressure. 14 Close the file with or without saving it.IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. Inspecting the System In this exercise. and double-click 3D HVAC Building.Design ➤ 3D Views. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_i.

4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. and pressure information including pressure loss. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. flow. as required. This information helps you modify the system design. An inspection flag reports the section number. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler.3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

Note that the Flow is 80 GPM. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. you need to validate them. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. and notice that the Static Pressure is 7. 9 Using the same method. select 90° F. targeting those systems that need attention.88 psi. and to size pipe. as shown. and the Pressure Loss is 1. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. inspect Section 6 again. and click OK.67 psi. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. In this exercise. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open.65 psi and the Pressure Loss is 1.Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. 10 Click Finish. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties. Checking Piping Systems | 151 .89 psi. the Static Pressure is 7. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. for Fluid Temperature.

Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. After you assign components to a system.rvt. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder.HVAC Plan . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. For example. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. 6 In the Project Browser. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. double-click Level 1 .Design. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH is listed. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. If you place components without assigning them to a system.HVAC Plan . As you learned when placing components. and click View.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. 4 In the System Browser. After you have assigned all components to systems. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. thus assigning the components to a system. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. In the System Browser. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). and double-click Level 3 . 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. right-click the Systems titlebar. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. Warnings display. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. and for pipe sizing. the pipe is associated with that system. 9 Right-click CHWS. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. 8 Expand Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. and click Show to view all of the system components. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed.Design. click Training Files. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. 7 In the System Browser.

and confirm unassigned system components. click Close. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. and select Level 3 . and click Expand All. 10 Using the same methods. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. 12 In the System Browser. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. 13 Right-click CHWR. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. Checking Piping Systems | 153 . 14 Using the methods that you learned.HVAC Plan . expand the Unassigned folder. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. otherwise. right-click Hydronic Return.TIP If you have multiple views open.Design floor plan.

154 .

155 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system.Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial.

156 .

Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings. Define required lighting. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 157 . Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels. you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system.

In this exercise you review electrical settings. expand Wiring .Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. and demand factors that are applied in the design. distribution systems. select Copper. enter THHN. For Material. Select Correction Factor. speeding up the design phase.rvt. ■ ■ For Factor. Click OK. You also add a wiring type. ■ ■ For Material. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. select Wiring Types. select 75. and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_01_i. click Training Files. select Copper. wiring. enter 1. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. 158 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . For Temperature. As you place components and create circuits. ■ Click New Correction Factor.Wire Sizes.04. select 90. click (Open). Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. For Temperature Rating.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Insulation, select THHN. For Max Size, enter 2000. For Neutral Multiplier, enter 1.0. Select Neutral Required. For Neutral Size, select Hot Conductor Size. For Conduit Type, select Steel.

Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane, select Voltage Definitions. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. By specifying a range, you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 240. For Value, enter 240. For Minimum, enter 220. For Maximum, enter 250.

Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane, select Distribution Systems. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 120/240. For Phase, select Single. For Wires, select 3. For L-L Voltage, select 240. For L-G Voltage, select 120.

Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane, select Demand Factors. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Load Classification, select Power. Under More Than, select 10000 VA. Click Split. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor, enter 50. Click OK.

11 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces.

Specifying Electrical Settings | 159

Defining Required Lighting
In this exercise, you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building, such as offices, restrooms, and conference rooms. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level), then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. In this case the key style is the type of space and, because the key is linked to your new project parameter, its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. Later in the tutorial, you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_02_i.rvt.

Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Required Lighting Level. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type of Parameter, select Illuminance. For Group Parameter Under, select Electrical - Lighting. Under Categories, select Spaces. Verify that Instance is selected. Click OK twice. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces, under the Electrical - Lighting group in the space element properties.

Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 5 In the drawing area, zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218.

6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

7 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Electrical - Lighting, note the Required Lighting Level parameter. Click OK. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 9 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Requirements. Select Schedule Keys, and for Key Name, enter Lighting Levels. Click OK.

10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click Required Lighting Level, and click OK. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text.

Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row, enter Open Office. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column, enter 45. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed.

16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. 17 Complete the table by entering the following:

The fc value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type, which is mapped to project units. Notice that as you enter the data, the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level.

Defining Required Lighting | 161

Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

For Sort By, select Required Lighting Level. Select Blank Line.

21 Click OK twice. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level.

22 Using the same method, change the sort order back to the default setting. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element.

25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that under Electrical-Lighting, that Required Lighting Level is blank. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Lighting Levels, select Instruction-Standard. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 50 fc and the field is dimmed, since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. The

162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key, select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value, or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter, the value input applies only to the selected space. 27 Click OK. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog.

28 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules
Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. In this exercise, you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. Later in this exercise, you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value, which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_03_i.rvt.

Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Schemes, for Category, select Spaces. Under Schemes, click (Duplicate).

3 In the New Color Scheme dialog, for Name, enter Required Lighting and click OK. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Scheme Definition, for Title, enter Required Lighting Levels. For Color, select Required Lighting Level, and click OK to dismiss the alert message.

5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:

Under Scheme Definition, verify the By Range is selected.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 163

Select the scheme for At Least 20.00 fc, and click (Add Value). This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. For example, if you select the value for 20 fc and click Add, then the new value will be 40 fc. If you select the value for 20 fc again and click Add, then the new value will be 30 fc or half of the difference between the two values you are adding.

With the scheme for At Least 20. 00 fc still selected, click

(Add Value) again.

Select the scheme for At Least 40.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

■ ■ ■

Select the scheme for 30.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

Select the scheme for 50.00 fc, enter 75.00, and press ENTER. Select the scheme for 40.00 fc, enter 50.00, and press ENTER.

Click OK.

Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting CF. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 8 In the drawing area, click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Space Type, select Spaces. For Color Scheme, select Required Lighting. Click OK.

The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created.

164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 11 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK.

12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Available Fields, double-click Number, Name, Level, Average Estimated Illumination, and Required Lighting Level. 13 Click Calculated Value. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Lighting Delta. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type, select Illuminance. For Formula, click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Average Estimated Illumination. Click OK.

In the Calculated Value dialog, for Formula, at the end of Average Estimated Illumination, press the spacebar, type a hyphen, and click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Required Lighting Level. Click OK twice.

15 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Level. Select Header. Select Blank Line. On the Formatting tab, for Fields, select Lighting Delta. Click Conditional Format.

In the Conditional Formatting dialog, under Condition, for Test, select Not Between.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165

Click OK three times. for Custom Colors. Click Background Color. enter -5 fc and 5 fc.■ ■ For Value. The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -5 fc and 5 fc are highlighted in red. ■ ■ In the Color dialog. select Red. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System .

Create power loads. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. Create a panel schedule. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. Then. power circuits. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. First. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. as you place lighting fixtures. 167 . Use the System Browser to check your design.

Lighting Color Fill view is open. for the Spaces Category. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK.00 fc. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_i. select Average Estimated Illumination. select the color legend. select Orange. In the Color dialog.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.00 fc. for Basic Colors. select the color for Less Than 20. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. click Training Files. 2 In the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 168 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. You can create additional color schemes. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 .rvt. By using orange as the color for this range. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 20. Under Scheme Definition. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. click (Open). Click OK.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. 10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. indicating a value greater than 0 fc. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner. 8 In the Project Browser. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met.7 In the Project Browser. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc.277VM_Plain Recessed Lighting Fixture 600x600 . however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view. The red field will clear once the +/. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field.5 fc range is satisfied. which is the lowest value in the specified range. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. all three of these colored fields will clear to white.Lighting Ceiling plan. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 169 . zoom to space Library 219. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. 13 Click the Level 2 . The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x2’ (2 Lamp) . Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order.277. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 .5 fc range. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.

NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. 23 Click OK. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 20 Select the lighting fixture. 25 On the Options Bar. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 170 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 18 Click to place the fixture. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown. the fixtures will move accordingly. select Multiple. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated.The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically.

31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown. select Multiple. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 171 .NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 27 Press ESC to end the command. 28 In the drawing area. select the 3 fixtures. 30 On the Options Bar. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.

172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures. 33 Click to activate the Schedule window. Note the value in red for the space Library 219. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically.32 Press ESC.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . and for Category. click Check None. Click OK. 36 In the Filter dialog. 37 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (2 Lamp) .35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.277V. select Lighting Fixtures.

174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Note the changes for the space Library 219. 38 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view.The values in the schedule are updated automatically.

41 On the Options Bar. Note the changes for the space Library 219.277V. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175 . The lighting delta is satisfied. 40 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. click the ceiling grid line as shown.39 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) . select Multiple Alignment. 42 In the drawing area.

43 Click the left edge of the first fixture. 44 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures. The fixture aligns. 176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

In the left pane of the Open dialog. 46 Close the file with or without saving it. you modify the light fixture IES files. In the next exercise. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 177 .rvt. you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_i. click (Open). click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures In this exercise.45 Press ESC to end the command.

Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 . Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 . 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Click Edit Type. 2 Tile the views as shown.Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser. 178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Lighting Color Fill plan. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. scroll to view space space Library 219. Note the Average Estimated Illumination value of 46 fc.Lighting Plan. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting .

enter . Note the lighting type has changed to F14. Apply the lighting fixture type 8 Select all the fixtures in the center column in the Library as shown. ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical Loads.93. Under Photometrics. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. ■ Click OK twice. for Color Preset. for Ballast Loss Factor. ■ In the Initial Color dialog.ies and click Open. select Xenon and click OK. select T5 [HO]. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 179 . enter . In the Name dialog. Under Electrical. enter 162. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. enter F15. Note that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule.85. specify 15000. for Apparent Load. for Name enter 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. click the value for Initial Color.277V and click OK.00 VA. and click OK. ■ Under Photometrics.■ In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. Under Photometrics.00 lm. Click OK. select 463T5_S. click the value for Light Loss Factor. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. ■ Click Apply. In the Select File dialog. select Luminous Flux. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. for Lamp. for Type Mark. Under Photometrics. Under Identity Data. click the value for Initial Intensity.

10 In the Filter dialog. Click OK. 180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . select Lighting Fixtures. 12 Press ESC to deselect the fixtures. and that the lighting delta for the Library in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule also has been updated.277V.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Remove lighting fixtures 13 Select the 3 lighting fixtures in the center column of the Library as shown. click Check None. and for Category. 11 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . Note that the selected lighting fixtures have been updated.

Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 14 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. 15 In space Library 219. 16 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181 . select the top center fixture.Press Delete. Note the lighting delta updates again.

17 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Remove lighting fixtures 18 Select the 2 lighting fixtures as shown. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Note that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again.

and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_i. click (Open). and receptacles to your design. click Training Files. junction boxes. In the next exercise. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. zoom to space Computer Lab 222.rvt. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. you add switches. Placing Switches. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Placing Switches. Junction Boxes. 2 In the drawing area. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. The lighting delta has been updated and is now 0. and Receptacles | 183 .Press Delete. Junction Boxes.

5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face.Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . 7 Click to place the switch.277V. Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host. it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Wall Occupancy Sensor . 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown.3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting.

Select Junction Boxes . 9 Press ESC to end the command. 12 In the Load Family dialog. Junction Boxes. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family.NoLoad. browse to Revit MEP ➤ Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown.NoLoad: 4” Square is selected in the Type Selector. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. Placing Switches. The element type Junction Boxes .8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. and Receptacles | 185 .rfa and click Open.

Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. enter JB-1NL. you can enter a space to separate the unit values. 21 In the drawing area. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Offset. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . In the Type Properties dialog. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. zoom to space Library 219.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. enter 9’0”. NOTE When entering values. Click Edit Type. Click OK twice.14 Press ESC to end the command. 15 Select the junction box. Under Electrical. for Level 2 . for Mark. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. note the Number of Poles is 1. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box.

26 In the System Browser. and Receptacles | 187 . Expand Electrical. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. and Number of Elements. Select Size. Click OK. Expand General. 24 For any column. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. Placing Switches. Space Name. Space Number. 23 In the System Browser. This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Junction Boxes. and Voltage. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. Select Load. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. Distribution System. right-click and click Column Settings. NOTE If necessary.

34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 31 Close the System Browser.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 35 Select the dimension and enter 12’. 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles.

38 Select the receptacle. Placing Switches. select Copy and Multiple.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. and Receptacles | 189 . 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 40 On the Options Bar. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. Junction Boxes.

enter 12’ and press ENTER to place another receptacle. move the cursor along the wall. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and enter 12’ and press ENTER.41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. 42 Move the cursor down.

43 Press ESC to end the command. and Receptacles | 191 . Junction Boxes. Placing Switches.

45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown.Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 . Next you create lighting circuits and show wire. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans.48 Close the file with or without saving it. you need to create logical connections to define the topology. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan.

194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. 2 In the drawing area. zoom to the space Electrical 220. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment.equipment. and work toward the higher voltage.rvt. In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. click (Open). In the left pane of the Open dialog. Adding wiring to a project is optional. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_i. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP).

12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. enter PP-2B. for Distribution System. #1 Pole Breakers. for Max. select 120/208 Wye. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. for Distribution System.4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select 208V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . 14 Select the panelboard. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 8 Select the panelboard. 15 On the Options Bar. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 7 Press ESC to end the command. For Panel Name. Click OK. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . enter 20.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. 9 On the Options Bar.Loads. 5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. select 480/277 Wye.Surface: 100A.

Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. zoom to space Instruction 221. enter LP-2B. 23 In the Filter dialog. and for Category.Loads. For Panel Name. for Max. enter 20. 20 In the drawing area. which is the logical connection between the elements. click Check None.17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. #1 Pole Breakers. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. Click OK. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. Click OK. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space.

26 Select lighting panel LP-2B. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 . The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel.25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.

198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 33 Select the switch on the right. Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown. 32 Press ESC.28 Press ESC to end the command. 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Lighting Switches: Three Way.

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 . right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit.34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select Lighting Switches: Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. 35 Select the left three-way switch. 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit.

42 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and for Category. 40 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 43 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . Click OK.37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.Loads. Next you create circuits without showing wire. click Check None. Note that the tick marks are updated to show 4. select Wires. 38 Press ESC to end the command. Click OK. click (Open). 44 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. enter 2. except without wire. 41 In the Filter dialog. 39 Select all items in space Instruction 221. for Hot Conductors.

5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. right-click on the Systems heading. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and Voltage Drop are selected. and verify that Load. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_i. Rating.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. Click OK. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. expand Power. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. 13 In the System Browser.rvt. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. Expand Electrical. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. click Training Files. Distribution System. ■ 16 In the System Browser. 4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. Voltage. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. and then expand circuit 1. 2 In the drawing area.

18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. Click OK. change the Voltage to 277V. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Note the circuit in space Instruction 221. 22 With the junction box still selected. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. Note the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. 30 Close the System Browser. under Electrical. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog.

click Edit Type. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. 39 In the Type Properties dialog.Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and Vertical ➤ Top. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. 40 Click OK twice. Click Tags. 33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. note the label parameters and click Cancel. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . select Lighting Fixture Tag: Standard. Click OK. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. for Type Mark. enter FR4. 35 Press ESC to end the command. 47 In the drawing area. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. click below the first one to place it. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. under Identity Data. Click Yes.

Click OK. 56 In the Filter dialog. and for Category. select Break. Add tags to remaining fixtures 54 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. for File Name. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. 55 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and click Apply.rfa. Deselect Break and for Suffix. 61 Close the file with or without saving it. click Check None. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. Click OK. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . 57 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. 59 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. For Circuit Number. enter a comma. Note the tag is updated in the drawing area. 60 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. 52 In the Save As dialog. select Lighting Fixture Tags. Click Save. Next you create a switch system.48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. Click OK. 58 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. enter Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag.

and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_i.rvt. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. enter a. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. Click OK.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. Note that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Switch ID. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. click (Open). Creating a Switch System | 205 . 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. under Electrical Lighting. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 2 In the drawing area. click Training Files.

20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. Click OK. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch.Lighting. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. for switch ID. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. Note the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. enter b. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . under Electrical . 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor.

and data systems. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Next you create a circuit and size wire. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. and for Category. click (Open). Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). select the PP-2B panel. 2 In the drawing area. 4 In the Filter dialog. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog.26 Close the file with or without saving it. click Check None.rvt. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a pick box to select all the components in the space. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. select Electrical Fixtures. Circuits are used for power. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. 7 In space Electrical 220. lighting. Creating Power Loads | 207 . Click OK. click Training Files.

14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. enter 2. 15 In the Load Family dialog. 19 Click OK. navigate to Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. for Hot Conductors. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires.rfa. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks.Loads. and in the drawing area. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. Click OK. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. under Electrical . select Hook Wire Tick Mark. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. and in the right pane. select Wiring. 13 Select the wire again. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. and click Element Properties. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. and click Open. select Long Wire Tick Mark.8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel.

25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. 21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. as shown. select the PP-2B panel. Creating Power Loads | 209 . Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring.The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. and click to select the circuit. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. 22 In space Electrical 220.

and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. in space Instruction 221. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. There are only 3 tick marks 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown.26 Press Delete. Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. 29 In space Instruction 221. as shown. click the connector of the first receptacle. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. 28 In the drawing area.

rvt. select panel LP-2B. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. click Open. Finally. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_i. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. zoom to space Electrical 220. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. 2 In the drawing area. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . click Training Files. Next you balance the loads for your design. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. 3 In the Electrical space.on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222.

and Phase C . Under Electrical-Loads. click Rebalance Loads. 1-#10. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. 1-#10. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. ■ ■ Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. 1-#12. 1-#12. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. Click OK. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .3712 VA. Phase B 3636 VA. Scroll down. 12 Select panel PP-2B. Notice that the loads on Phase A. for Rating. and C shows an imbalance with the heaviest load 6932 VA on Phase A. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. while Phase B provides 2004 VA. 14 Close the warning dialog. enter 30A. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. 6 Click OK. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. B. The loads are now more evenly distributed over the three phases (Phase A .3616 VA).4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. and Phase C provides 2028 VA. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12.

Select PP-2B. click Training Files. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. under Electrical . The Panel Schedule Report appears in a new window. under Electrical . 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit.15 Select panel PP-2B. 17 Close the warning dialog. and click OK. Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. 24 Select the transformer TP-2B. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit.Loads. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_i. Next you create a panel schedule. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power.rvt. click (Open). 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. and click OK. enter 30A.Loads. Click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. for Rating. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. for Rating. enter 25A.

for Font Size. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. 10 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. for Font Size. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . under Other. Under Header Text. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. enter 1/8. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. for Font. Under Header Text. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. 8 Click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties.Panel Schedules. click Training Files. 5 In the Project Browser.rvt. select Bold and Italic. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. click Edit. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. Under Body Text. click (Open). This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_i. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. and open E601 . 7 Select the schedule. expand Sheets (all). 11 Click OK twice. select Berlin Sans FB. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. 4 Close the report. for Appearance. enter 3/32. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. 6 In the Project Browser.

and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall. Checking Your Design | 215 . Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 2. note that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. notice that PP-2C for circuit 2 is updated. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. Expand Unassigned. In the System Browser. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading.View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. select space Lounge 212. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall and press TAB once. 12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 11 Select the receptacle on the right side wall. each with a load of 180VA. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. Note the receptacle in space Lounge 212. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 2. In the System Browser. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. press TAB once. Notice that the receptacle on the right side wall is not connected to circuit 2.

click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. 17 In the drawing area. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. for Panel. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 216 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . zoom to space Electrical 214. select MDP-1. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. 16 Close the details dialog. 20 On the Options Bar. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 18 Select panel LP-2C.14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. under Warnings. 15 In the dialog.

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system. 217 .Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial.

218 .

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Sanitary. in addition to loading existing families.rvt. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_i. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Duplicate. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. planning is critical to a successful design. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. type PVC . You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems.Vent. right-click PVC . and verify that Level 1 . expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. 3 In the Type Properties dialog.Plumbing Plan . 2 In the Project Browser. Adding a pipe size. In this lesson.Design is open. you create a PVC pipe type. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. In this exercise. 219 . and click Properties. and click OK. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. 4 In the Name dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. click Training Files.

27 For the new pipe size.DWV. 24 For Inside Diameter. enter 1/2''. and click Main. 22 Click New Size. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. Tee. enter 27/32''.rfa. PVC .0''. Cross. select Sanitary. 13 In the right panel. 10 On the Selection panel. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion.Vent is listed. For Offset. and open Imperial\Families\Trap P .5 In the Type Properties dialog. for Pipe Connector Tolerance. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. for Material. select Sanitary. 25 For Outside.DWV: Standard.Sch 40 . click Training Files.Sch 40 . 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. Tap. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. click Pipe Settings. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . 15 For System Type. under Mechanical. select None. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . select Tee. select Branch. enter -4' .DWV: Standard. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. click Modify. In the Project Browser. refer to Revit MEP Online Help. enter 5/8''.Sch 40 . 17 In the left pane. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 18 For System Type. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. select Tee Reducing Double Vent . 21 In the right pane. select Tee Vent . 28 Close the file with or without saving it. 26 Click OK. under Pipe Types. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main.PVC . 6 Click OK. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type.PVC . 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. enter 10°. select Plastic. for Nominal.PVC . and click OK.

sanitary piping. Create the hot water system. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. and hot and cold water piping.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. 221 . vent. including plumbing fixtures. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. Create the sanitary plumbing system. add a hot water heater. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. Create the cold water system. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system.

Design ➤ Floor Plans. NOTE To identify a space name and number. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_i.Plumbing Plan . click Training Files. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise. move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information. as shown. 1 urinal. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . In the left pane of the Open dialog. including the men’s room (space Male 107). Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser. and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room.Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise. 222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and verify that Level 1 . you add 2 toilets.Design is open. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan.rvt.

Flush Valve . 4 On the Element panel. under Water Closet . Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components. and 3 sinks. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223 . 5 On the Placement panel. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. against the left wall. as shown. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. select Public .The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls.Wall Mounted. in the Type Selector.1. 1 wall-mounted urinal.6 gpf. centered on the bottom horizontal reference line.

7 Click to place another toilet. use the reference line to center the fixture. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line. select 3/4'' Flush Valve. 224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .) 8 Press Esc. above the first in the standard toilet space. and press Esc. zoom in closer. (Again. Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector. under Urinal .Wall Hung. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces.

under Floor Drain .Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector. select 5''x5'' Strainer . Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225 . 12 On the Placement panel. 14 Click Modify. you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. click Place on Face. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 6'' and 6'' from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas).Rectangular.2'' Drain. In placing the fixture.

rvt. click Training Files. 226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click in the System Browser table heading. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. Creating a Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. 17 If all disciplines are displayed. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_i. 16 Click the title bar for the browser. and a floor drain. and review the components listed under this system. In this exercise. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. and Default Domestic Cold Water. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. and click View ➤ Piping. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). a urinal. 20 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder. and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary.Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 19 Expand Default Sanitary. 18 Expand the Unassigned folder. you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets.

7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . Creating a Sanitary System | 227 .Plumbing Plan . and click OK.Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Only plumbing fixtures are selected. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. 6 In the plan view.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and verify that Level 1 . draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 8 In the Filter dialog. clear Lines (<Overhead>). verify that Plumbing Fixtures is selected. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 2 In the Project Browser.Design is open.

If you deselected the drain. expand Sanitary. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. 228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted. click Finish Editing System. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors. for System Name. 13 In the Systems Browser. so the Create Sanitary System is available.9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. 11 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Edit System panel. the Create Cold Water System option would also be available. enter Sanitary 107. 10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. You include the bathroom space number in the name. and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed.

and click OK. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. select Sanitary 107.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. at the midpoint of the detail lines. for example. a toilet. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. The base is placed. select one of the components in the system. as shown. A preview of the piping layout displays. 16 In the Select a System dialog. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 .

The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. click Solutions. enter -1' 0''.19 On the Options Bar. for Offset. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. The default settings are automatically modified. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter 1/8'' / 12''. 24 In the left pane. select 4''. 26 On the Options Bar. 21 On Options Bar. 25 On the Options Bar. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. 23 For Offset. and click OK. You accept this suggested solution. 27 Click Modify. select Main. enter -4'-0”. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. for Diameter. and modify it to meet project requirements. select Intersections. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. for Slope. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. enter -1' 0''. for Solution Type. and for Offset. select Branch. and click Settings. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system.

29 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow). and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point.Customize the suggested layout 28 While pressing Ctrl. Creating a Sanitary System | 231 . select the vertical route path segments.

as shown. as shown.30 In the 3D view. 31 Click Modify. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. 32 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets. use the ViewCube to orient the view. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

34 On the Generate Layout panel. click Finish Layout. adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet.33 Using the previous method. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 .

■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 36 Click to select the fitting to the drain. select the fitting and click to reorient it. 35 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing view. When a fitting is reversed. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity.

The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. adding sinks in the men’s room. 38 Close the file with or without saving it. you continue with the work from the last exercise. as shown. and check the slope control.37 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise.

in the Type Selector. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107).Design ➤ Floor Plans.Rectangular. 5 On the Placement panel. and verify that Level 1 . and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_i. click Training Files. under Lavatory .rvt.Design is open. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser. select 22''x22'' .Public. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 4 On the Element panel.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 6 Click to place the sink centered on the top horizontal reference line.Plumbing Plan . as shown.

and press Enter to create a second sink. in this step you can enter 2 4 (two space four) to specify 2' 4''. without having to enter ' and '' symbols. enter 2' 4''. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.7 Click Modify. ■ Move the cursor up above the top reference line. select Multiple. For example. TIP When entering dimensions. 8 Select the sink. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. you can enter a space to separate the value for feet and inches. On the Options Bar. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 .

238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . click Finish Editing System. 15 Click the 3 sinks. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel.■ ■ Enter 2' 4''. 12 In the drawing area. click Add To System. 16 On the Edit System panel. Press Esc. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and press Enter to create the third sink. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 11 In the System Browser.

under Design ➤ Plumbing . and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. double-click 3D Plumbing. use the ViewCube to orient the view. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). and click Draw Pipe. 22 In the plan view.In the System Browser. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. 19 In the 3D view. with the tee fitting selected. as shown. 20 Select the fitting. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 .Design ➤ 3D Views. 21 Select the tee.

the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. NOTE Piping is displayed according to color filters specified in the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. enter 2' . 24 On the Options Bar. 27 Click Modify. When you press the Spacebar. for Offset. and click Apply. 26 On the Options Bar. piping connected to the sanitary system displays in olive green. In this example.23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. press Spacebar. for Slope. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .6''. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. and click to draw the pipe. enter 1/8'' / 12''.

29 In the Type Selector. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . click to place the fitting.PVC .DWV. 31 Click Modify. select Standard. and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks. move the cursor over the stub pipe. 30 In the 3D view.3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 32 Select the double wye fitting. under Wye 45 Deg Double . and when the vertical center line displays.Sch 40 .

on the Options Bar. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . for Offset. right-click the right connector. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. and press Enter. double-click the section head to open the section view. and click Draw Pipe.33 With the fitting selected. zoom in to the double wye fitting. enter 1'. In the next steps. 37 Select the fitting. you add pipe segments to the double wye. enter 6''. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. 36 In the section view. and press Enter. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. 34 Press Esc.

40 Click Modify. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. 41 Using the same method. as shown.Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. and click to place the pipe. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. 42 Click Modify.

46 In the section view. 49 Using the same method. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. and press Esc.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. press Spacebar. 47 Move the cursor down. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. 48 Click Modify. draw a 6'' pipe for the other 2 sinks. and click Draw Pipe. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. enter 6''. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . right-click the bottom connector.

You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks. 56 Using the same method. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks. under Trap P . 51 In the Type Selector. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 .50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.DWV. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink.Sch 40 . select the P-Trap on the left.PVC . 53 Using the same method. You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps. select Standard. 52 In the plan view. 54 Click Modify. 55 In the 3D view.

57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. Click Modify. Click in the plan view. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. and click Draw Pipe. Select the double wye pipe on the left. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. enter 6''. 58 Using the same method. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . connect the right sink to the double wye. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view.. Move the cursor to the left. select the left P-Trap. In the plan view. and press Enter. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.

In the Type Selector. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. select PVC Sanitary. while pressing Ctrl. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. On the Routing Solutions panel. and select a proposed solution. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . select the section of pipe you just drew. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view.■ In the 3D view. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. under Pipe Types. click Finish to select the recommended solution. while pressing Ctrl. as shown. Press Esc.

65 Close the file with or without saving it. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. for Slope. adjusting the sanitary stack. click Training Files.rvt. 62 On the Options Bar. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 63 On the Slope Editor panel. You have appropriately sloped the pipe. and verify the slope. click Finish. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_i. verify that 1/8'' / 12'' is selected.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope.

Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 .Sch 40 . 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. select the vertical stack. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .PVC . and click Draw Pipe. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 9 In the Type Selector. 3 In the Section view. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing.Design. click Modify. 5 Select the tee. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .DWV. and click the intersection to place the fitting. and click to draw the pipe. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 . select the elbow fitting on the right.Plumbing Plan . Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.Floor level line. 7 On the Selection panel. Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 38.Overall. under Wye Combination with 8th Bend . as shown.Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. select Standard.Design. 10 In the 3D view. right-click the top connector.

as shown. for Offset. Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.PVC . select Standard. 18 In the plan view.DWV. 15 Press Esc. click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe.Sch 40 .11 Click Modify. under Plug . and click the rotate control to change the orientation. enter 1'-0”. 17 In the Type Selector. 250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 14 On the Options Bar. 13 Click the rotate control once. 12 Select the fitting.

20 Close the file with or without saving it. and verify that Level 1 . A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Creating the Cold Water System In this exercise. click Training Files. Creating the Cold Water System | 251 . you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.19 Click Modify.Plumbing Plan . The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design is open. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_i. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .rvt.

minimize the Sanitary system. select Main. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 7 In the left pane. verify that the value is 9' 0''. To minimize opportunities for piping interference. 17 In the Filter dialog. and click OK. select Domestic Cold Water. you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping. click Check None.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. under Design ➤ Plumbing . enter 9' 3''. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. For Offset. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen.) 10 Click OK. select Domestic Hot Water. 9 In the left pane. urinal. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. if necessary. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. select Branch. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. select Plumbing Fixtures. expand Unassigned. select Pipe Types: Water. 4 In the right pane. and click Main. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. select Domestic Hot Water.Design ➤ 3D Views. and sinks. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser. 3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog. 6 In the left pane. and for System Type. select Branch. For Offset.2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. select Pipe Types: Water. 252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 14 In the System Browser. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type. double-click 3D Plumbing . These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors.Overall. draw a selection box to select the toilets. for System Type. 15 In the plan view. for System Type. and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed.

notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. In the System Browser. Notice that the water main displays in blue. 20 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For System Name. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view. For Flow Conversion Method.18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. indicating that it is now part of the cold water system. 21 On the Edit System panel. click Finish Editing System. Creating the Cold Water System | 253 . 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets. verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected. 19 On the System Tools panel. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. click Edit System. enter DCW 107. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.

For Offset. 36 Move the cursor to the left. select 3/4''. 31 On the Options Bar. 35 In the Type Selector. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 28 In the Type Selector. as shown.2 7/8''. and click Draw Pipe. enter 0”/12”. 254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . For Slope. 34 In the plan view. 37 On the Options Bar. for Offset. press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. 33 Click Modify. right-click the top DCW connector. enter 10'. under Pipe Types. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. 29 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Diameter. for Offset. enter 3' . enter 4'0”. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink. enter 7''. click to the left of the urinal. connect the second toilet. select the sink above the urinal. 32 Move the cursor to the right. select Water. 30 In the plan view. and press Enter. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. as shown. and press Enter. 26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe.25 Using the same method. at the intersection of the water main pipe. and click to place the pipe. and click the connector.

and click OK. Creating the Cold Water System | 255 . 42 In the Select Connector dialog. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe. 41 Select the top sink. 40 Click Modify. The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.39 Move the cursor to the left. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 1'' : In. and click to connect to the main cold water line.

44 Using the same method. Creating the Hot Water System In this exercise. add a water heater. 256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. you create the hot water system. connect the middle sink to the branch pipe.

5 In the System Browser. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing . and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. select the 3 sinks. while pressing Ctrl. and verify that Level 1 .Overall.rvt. expand the Unassigned folder. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_i. Creating the Hot Water System | 257 .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Plumbing Plan . open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser. 6 In the plan view. click Training Files.Design is open.

the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories).Tankless. click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom. Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. Default Domestic Hot Water. When designing systems. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. 258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Default Domestic Cold Water. 13 In the plan view. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. you edit the system to add equipment. 10 In the System Browser. for System Name. 15 In the System Browser. in the Unassigned folder.7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. and click Edit System. enter Domestic Hot Water 107.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. 12 In the Type Selector. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. verify that DCW 107 is selected. under Water Heater . In later steps. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. select 0. 14 Click Modify. as shown. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater.6 Gallon. and click OK.

19 Select the water heater.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. right-click the middle left connector. 22 In the Type Selector. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. Slope: 0''/12''. 26 Move the cursor to the right. specify: ■ ■ ■ Diameter: 1''. enter 1' 6''. enter 10’. click Finish Editing System. for Offset. 23 On the Options Bar. 27 Click Modify. and click the water main line. select the water heater. Offset: 4' 6''. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view. and select Draw Pipe. 24 Move the cursor up. as shown. and on the Edit System panel. Creating the Hot Water System | 259 . 21 On the Placement Tools panel. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. and press Enter. 25 On the Options Bar.

right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water). click Finish Editing System. 30 On the System Tools panel. 37 On the Options Bar. click Edit System. select 4'-6''. select Domestic Hot Water 107. click Automatically Connect to switch it off. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. enter 1''. enter 9' 0''. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater. 260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and in the System Selector. for Offset. and click just to the left of the cold water pipe. 33 On the Edit System panel.Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view. and click Draw Pipe. 38 Move the cursor to the right. as shown. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater. enter 1' 6''. 35 On the Options Bar. 36 Move the cursor down. select a sink. and for Offset. for Diameter. and press Enter. and on the Placement Tools panel.

and click just above the bottom sink. Creating the Hot Water System | 261 . enter 1’. and press Enter. for Offset. 41 Move the cursor down. 42 Click Modify.39 Move the cursor down. enter 2' 8''. as shown. 40 On the Options Bar.

45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool.43 In the 3D view. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal). 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe.

Creating the Hot Water System | 263 . 47 Optional: Open the RME_Plumb_Design_07_i.rvt project and view the vent piping for the plumbing system.46 Close the file with or without saving it.

264 .

265 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system.Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial.

266 .

expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. 267 . You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. If the tutorial training files are not present. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. You create a new pipe type. In this tutorial. and click Duplicate. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_i. click Training Files. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. you can choose to save your work. However.rvt.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. In this lesson. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Right-click Standard. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. After finishing each exercise. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type.autodesk. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. go to http://www.

For System Type. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. For Offset. click Rename.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. Next. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. you create project parameters and work with schedules. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. select Fire Protection Wet. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 10 Close the file with or without saving it. or architectural components. select Main. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. However. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. and click Properties. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. select Fire Protection Wet. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. 6 In the Project Browser. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. In the left pane. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. structural beams. select Carbon Steel. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. duct. and then click OK. For Pipe Type. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. For Pipe Type. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. verify that 9' 0" is selected. In this exercise. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. 9 Click OK. and enter Fire Protection Wet. you modify the type properties of the pipe. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. For Offset. verify that 9' 0" is specified. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. In the next exercise. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. for Material. under Mechanical. For System Type.

8 Using a crossing window. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Determining Zone Requirements | 269 .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_i. and click Element Properties. For Group parameter under. select Spaces. When you highlight a space using the cursor. 6 In the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Add. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. enter Sprinkler Zone. select space Instruction 221 as shown. select Fire Protection. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. the space crossing lines display. indicating that it’s the active view. under Fire Protection. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . right-click. enter Zone 1.rvt.Fire Protection Plan . 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. select the upper half of the building.Design is highlighted. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. for Name. click Training Files. Under Categories. for Sprinkler Zone. 5 Click OK twice. and then click OK. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK. 10 In the Filter dialog. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_i. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. you create schedules for sprinkler design. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. 13 Using the same method. for Sprinkler Zone. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. and then click OK. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. under Fire Protection. to which you add various parameters. including a calculated value parameter.rvt. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. select Zone 1. click Training Files. enter Zone 2. and then click OK.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. verify that only Spaces are selected. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. under Fire Protection. and then access instance properties. for Sprinkler Zone.

■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. For Type of Parameter. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. 7 Click OK.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. Click OK. double-click on each column separator. The schedule displays. In the Maximum Spacing column. For Units. 10 In the Format dialog. enter Protection Area Construction Type.Fire Protection Plan . 15 In the new row: ■ ■ In the Protection Area Type column. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Maximum Spacing. Obstructed-Combustible. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. and on the ribbon. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. for Name. 9 On the Formatting tab. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. For Rounding. select To the nearest 1'.Design is highlighted. 6 Using the same method. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. 11 Click OK twice. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. select Spaces. click Add Parameter. select Feet and fractional inches. enter Maximum Spacing. and click Field Format. For Key name. select Fire Protection. Select Schedule keys. enter 15. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . For Name. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. For Group parameter under. indicating that it’s the active view. click the Formatting tab. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . enter Light.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . select Length. 14 Select the new header. Click OK.

add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. enter Sprinkler Schedule. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary.■ In the Maximum Coverage Area column. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. 16 Using the same method. Click OK. enter 130. Unobstructed Extra. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. under Available fields. For Name. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . Unobstructed Maximum Spacing 15' Maximum Coverage Area 200 SF 15' 12' 12' 12' 15' 15' 200 SF 90 SF 90 SF 90 SF 130 SF 130 SF 15' 130 SF Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. select Spaces. Unobstructed Ordinary. and press Enter.

and click View Properties. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Common. Click OK. for Sort by. For Formula. and click Field Format. For Rounding. For Units. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. under Other. In the Fields dialog. and click OK. enter Minimum Sprinklers. Select Header and Blank line. select Number. select Sprinkler Zone. select Area. 22 Click OK twice. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. click . 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. For Type. select Minimum Sprinklers. 19 Click the Formatting tab. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . Enter the formula operator / after Area. For Then by. 20 On the Formatting tab. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. select 0 decimal place. Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. select Fixed. For Discipline. for Sorting/Grouping. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. select Level. click Edit.■ ■ ■ ■ Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing Click Calculated Value. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list).

■ ■ ■ ■ Select Header and Blank line. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. ■ In the Format dialog. select Sprinkler Zone. 26 Click OK 3 times. and click View Properties. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. For Fields. 27 In the drawing area. select Level. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. click Edit. Under Field formatting. and then select Hidden field. select Level equals Level 2. For Fields. right-click the schedule. select Number. for Filter. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . and select Totals only. 30 Click OK twice. At the bottom of the dialog. For Then by (second instance). select Minimum Sprinklers. verify that Use default settings is selected. select Hidden field. and then click Field Format. select Grand totals. for Filter by.

Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. On the Formatting tab. select Sprinklers. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. for Fields. and Count. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. for Embedded Schedule. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. for Available fields. select Count. click Edit. select Grand totals. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. and click View Properties. double-click Type. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. under Other. For Category. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. and select Totals only.The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Under Field formatting. System Name. select Calculate totals. select Embedded Schedule. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. delete the word Maximum.

42 In the Instance Properties dialog.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Fire Protection Plan Design. Unobstructed. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. 43 Click Cancel. select space 221 Instruction. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. for Protection Area Construction Type. 41 In the plan view. select Light. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. under Identity Data. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. 46 With the space still selected. and the spacing parameter values are evident. 52 Click OK. Unobstructed. and access the instance properties. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Ordinary. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. under Identity Data. Unobstructed. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . under Identity Data. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. 48 In the floor plan. and click OK. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. 50 Access the instance properties. select space 221 Instruction. but their values are not determined. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Protection Area Construction Type. 44 In the schedule. double-click FP . select Ordinary. As a result.

53 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .

278 .

autodesk. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you can choose to save your work. methodology. As you create the system. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_i.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. By following the recommended workflow.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 2 . However.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. 279 . This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. you will understand the process. click Training Files.rvt. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. go to http://www. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. If the tutorial training files are not present. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. At the end of this tutorial. After finishing each exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. As you place the sprinklers.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise.

When there is a small misalignment. After placing the initial sprinkler. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. 3 In the Project Browser.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. When this happens. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view.

Pendent . place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. while pressing Ctrl. and select Sprinkler . and click to place 3 sprinklers.Semi-Recessed Hosted : 1/2" Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. 11 In the drawing area. 9 In space Instruction 202. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. as shown. 10 Press Esc twice. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . select the sprinklers that you placed. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 203 and 204.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel.

14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active.12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 13 On the Options Bar. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . verify that Constrain is cleared. as shown. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. 15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. Next. and then press Esc. you place non-hosted sprinklers. Also.

FP_Ceiling view. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. 17 In the Project Browser. for Offset. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building.Design. open Design ➤ FP . Because the sprinkler is not hosted. you place non-hosted sprinklers. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. specify a vertical offset. Next. 18 Type WT. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. and click Element Properties. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. Adding Sprinklers | 283 . 25 Click OK. For Number. enter 10' 6". 29 Press Esc.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . you adjust the offset. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected.Fire Protection Plan . enter 14' 6". click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. This number is determined in the schedule. Notice that the schedule updates. 16 Close the ceiling plan view. and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. enter 11. under Constraints. move the cursor to the right. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0' 0". and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. 19 In the floor plan. and 200C). You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. and press Enter. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . and select Sprinkler-Upright : 1/2" Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. 22 In the 200A Corridor space.Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. 200B.

IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. click Training Files. 1 In the Project Browser. However. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. In this exercise. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_i. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Unlike logical connections (systems). you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. and then creating the logical connection between these system components.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Design is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. After creating the logical connection. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .30 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. and with piping (physical connection). you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. Creating a Piping System In this exercise.Fire Protection Plan . In the next exercise.

and assign the selected sprinklers to it. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. Creating a Piping System | 285 . 8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. within the Piping Systems folder. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. and select Piping. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. 5 Right-click the header. click View ➤ Systems. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. In the System Browser. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet 1 system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. as shown.2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. named Fire Protection Wet. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. As you assign sprinklers to systems. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces.

you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. 12 On the Options Bar. The Edit Piping System panel displays. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. 14 Click Finish Editing System. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. For Offset. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. The Generate Layout tools are activated. 11 With the system still selected. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above level 2. double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the list of sprinklers. providing system editing tools. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. system equipment. Next. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. indicating the logical connection.Wet is selected. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. verify that 9' 0" is specified. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. click Settings. and a piping layout preview displays. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. and select the system. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. enter FP Wet_Zone2. verify that Main is selected. select an initial piping layout. 19 Click OK. For Pipe Type. and click Select. 15 In the drawing area. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers.Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. 13 In the System Browser. select Branch. for System Name. press Tab. and number of elements in the system. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. and on the Options Bar. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. In the left pane. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. place the cursor over a sprinkler.

click Place Base. 25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. as shown. 23 For Offset. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. click Solutions. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. enter -12' 0". 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. verify that Network is selected. these settings will convert the base component to a 2" riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (9' 0"). 22 On the Options Bar. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. and green represents branch lines).20 On the Generate Layout panel. and select solution 5. When the layout is finished. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. (elbow control) Creating a Piping System | 287 . In general. select 2". for Diameter.

29 Click Finish Layout. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2.■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. On the Generate Layout panel. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. click Modify. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. 28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. A (parallel movement control) displays. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . as shown.

View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. the Connect Into tool. and then you create piping to physically connect them. or that offset elevations are incorrect. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. and various manual pipe creation tools. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. or manually modify the pipe. 32 If necessary.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. Next. select a different layout solution.IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . Either relocate the system components. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting.

290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .Design is highlighted. and select the elbow fitting as shown. indicating that it’s the active view. 3 If necessary. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .rvt. 4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_i. 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom in. click Training Files. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines.Fire Protection Plan .

click Add To System. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 5 In the drawing area. and pipe or duct is created. air terminals. mechanical equipment. 11 On the Generate Layout panel. radiators. or a system component to display system tools. 13 Click Finish Layout. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. 18 Click Finish Editing System. 12 On the Options Bar. 8 In the corridor. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. click Finish Editing System. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. and so on) are logically connected by a system. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). 9 On the Edit System panel.The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. for Solution Type. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 3 sprinklers. verify that Network is selected. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . verify that Solutions is selected. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. 14 Close the System Browser. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. you can select the pipe or duct. and select solution 5. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the 3 spaces at the right end of the corridor.

right-click. 23 View the result in the 3D view.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. and then press Esc. 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . 27 On the Options Bar.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 25 Select the sprinkler. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. 21 In the Piping Plan. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. for Offset. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. and click Draw Pipe. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. 29 Using the same method. draw pipe from the last unconnected sprinkler to the main pipe.20 Open Design ➤ FP . and then tile the views. 28 In the drawing area. 24 In the Piping Plan. select 9'.

32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. 31 In the plan view. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. Because the whole system highlights. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 293 .Layout in 2D Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view.

click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. for Scale. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . double-click on the section head to open the section view. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint.rvt. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise.Design is highlighted.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_i. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area. ■ 6 Press Esc. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe.Fire Protection Plan . click Training Files. select 1/4" = 1'-0". 4 On the Options Bar.

8 Right-click, and click View Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Graphics, for Sub-Discipline, select FP - Design. For View Classification, select Design. Under Identity Data, for View Name, enter FP Section_Stair. For Default View Template, select MEP Section. Click OK.

10 In the Project Browser, right-click Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair, and click Apply Default View Template. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 12 If necessary, drag the top section boundary line up. 13 Select the elbow fitting, and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. 14 Select the tee fitting, and then right-click the top connector, and click Draw Pipe. 15 Press Spacebar. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel, and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection - Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Move the cursor up, enter 7', and press Enter.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295

18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 Make Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan - Design the active view. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel, and select M_Hose Reel Cabinet Surface Mounted : 1"25mm from the drop-down list. 22 In the drawing area, click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown, and then click Modify.

23 In the section view, zoom to the hose reel cabinet. 24 Select the cabinet, right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet, and click Draw Pipe.

296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

25 Verify that Fire Protection - Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 2"50mm. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is active. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps), and then click Modify.

29 Close the section view. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 31 In the alert dialog, click Yes to load a family. 32 In the Open dialog, navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Gate Valve - 2-12 Inch.rfa, and click Open. 33 In the Type Selector, verify that Gate Valve - 2" is selected. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet, as shown, and then click Modify.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297

A 2" gate valve is placed in the 2" diameter pipe.

35 Open 3D Fire Protection, and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D.

36 Close the file with or without saving it.

298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modifying Pipe Diameters
In this exercise, you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers, you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_i.rvt.

Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views, and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view.

NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter, height, or width. Changing the diameter, width, or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter, width, or height. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers, and because the design specifications require a 1 inch diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers, it’s more efficient to specify 1 inch diameter for all pipe runs, and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. 4 In the floor plan view, starting at the lower left corner of the wing, draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet).

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299

5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 6 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Pipe Fittings and Pipes, and click OK. 7 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 1". 8 Click Modify. All selected piping is now 1" diameter.

Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view, zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. 12 If necessary, click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog, . 13 Navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Pipe Size Tag.rfa, and click Open. 14 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Verify that Horizontal is selected. Clear Leader.

15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown, and after each segment highlights, click to place the tag. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments.

NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed. Press Esc.

300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view, select the linked architectural file. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. By hiding the linked file, you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 18 In the 3D view, select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet.

19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler, and when the section highlights, press Tab. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segement. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The main piping is selected and displays in red.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301

for Diameter. select 4". The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes.21 On the Options Bar. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 23 Close the 3D view. 26 Using the same method. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . change the diameter of the other top segments to 1 1/4" to accommodate sprinklers. for Diameter. and then tag the piping as shown. and maximize the floor plan. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 202 (next to the stairs). select 1 1/4". Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. 24 In the drawing area. 25 On the Options Bar. as shown. The pipe diameter is modified.

In this exercise.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. You added tags to pipes. For additional practice. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. you created a wet fire protection system. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. 304 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. In this tutorial. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_i.

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views. add annotations and dimensions. and create schedules for construction documentation for a project. 305 .Documenting a Project In this tutorial. create details.

306 .

under Floor Plans. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_i. and click Properties. dependent views. In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click Level 1. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. and click Rename. and view references. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. matchlines. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. If the view included detail graphics. and click OK. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing.rvt. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. right-click Copy of Level 1. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 2 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 307 . click Training Files. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. and apply a view template.

you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. 3 In the Rename View dialog.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1/8" = 1' scale. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. create dependent views for areas B and C. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller.rvt. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 10 In the drawing area. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_i. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. and click Rename. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. 4 Using the same method. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . views and put them on the sheet. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Apply Default View Template. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. 6 In the Project Browser. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. 9 Click OK. more focused. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. and click OK. and click OK. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. as shown. and then press Esc.

apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. 19 In the drawing area. Click OK. 20 Select the upper view reference and. 21 Using the same method. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. For Line Pattern. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . click the current value./ ---). Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references (displayed as . select black. 14 Click Finish Matchline. on the Options Bar. for Target view. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. For Line Weight. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. and then press Esc. In the Color dialog. 13 Press Esc twice. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. select 11. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. select Double Dash 5/8". and click OK.

as shown. 27 Using the same method. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet.22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. and zoom to each of the view references. 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 25 Using the same method.

and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_i. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. select Plumbing Isometric. Click OK. press Tab twice to highlight the pipe run. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. select Plumbing. 6 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. and select the section box. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. 8 Highlight a segment of the top horizontal piping. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. select Documentation. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . enter Plumbing Isometric . The section crop lines no longer display. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. for View Name. right-click 3D Plumbing.Domestic Water.Domestic Water. click Training Files. for View Classification. Under Graphics. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. For Sub-Discipline. and click Properties.rvt. and click Apply Default View Template. and click to select it.29 Close the file with or without saving it. right-click Plumbing Isometric . 7 Zoom in to the plumbing system. For Default View Template. 2 Zoom in.

9 Right-click. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . The selected piping displays as a dashed line. Click Apply. For Pattern. select Dash. press Tab 3 times. and click to select it. 10 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. select 3. change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dash Dot 3/16". 12 Using the same method. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. and then click OK. 11 Select the vertical segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater.

and click to select it. press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. 14 Right-click. and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. as shown). This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view.13 Highlight a segment of horizontal pipe below the sinks. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 .

Domestic Water view with detailing. and click to select it. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. highlight a segment of the sanitary piping. Click in the drawing area to start a text label. 18 Using methods learned previously. click Reveal Hidden Elements. click Close Reveal Hidden Elements. Right-click. In the drawing area. and click Unhide in view ➤ Elements.Sanitary Waste.15 Press Esc. Unhide the sanitary waste piping: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the View Control Bar. 17 Label the fixtures as shown. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . On the View Control Bar. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate the Plumbing Isometric . press Tab 3 times. ■ ■ ■ Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. On the View Control Bar. and rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label.

Add a spot slope annotation 19 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. you use a plan view to create a callout view. When the view is associated with a sheet. 25 Press Esc twice. and then place the callout view on a sheet. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. and click to place the spot slope annotation. select To the nearest 1/8". Creating Callout Views In this exercise. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. click on the Format value. for Rounding. 23 Click on the horizontal pipe below the sinks to select it. 24 Move the cursor above the pipe. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. 21 Click OK twice. verify that Common is selected. In the Format dialog. Creating Callout Views | 315 . as shown. For Slope. 20 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Discipline.

7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . for Scale. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 5 On the Options Bar.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom section of the plan). beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). click Training Files. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_i. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. indicating that it’s the active view. select 1/4"=1'-0''. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary.

13 In the Project Browser. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. under Sheets (all). Creating Callout Views | 317 . and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. select 5. using the same method. double-click M601 . drag it to the sheet. for Line Weight. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. ■ Expand the Callout Boundary category and. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser.8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. Click OK. 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ For the Callout Boundary category.

and select the viewport. right-click the callout view. Click OK. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. 15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and click Apply Default View Template. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. 17 In the Project Browser. for View Name.Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. Ductwork in coarse detail 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . For Default View Template. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. enter WSHP PART PLAN. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. For Title on Sheet.

The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information.Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Creating Callout Views | 319 . 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 214 Section. 19 Zoom in to the area near the central stairs and section markers.

enter Typical WSHP Detail. 24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. 25 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail).21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. and click Rename. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. under Names. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 26 In the Rename View dialog. right-click the detail view. and click Apply View Template. and click OK. and click OK. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .

symbols.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. you learn how to: ■ add text notes. ■ work with model-based components. ■ create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. and annotation to create a legend. 321 . duct tags. linetypes.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C.rvt. as shown. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans.Creating Annotations In this exercise. click Training Files. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. 8 With the text still selected. 322 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_i. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser.

a segment of round duct. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. select a supply diffuser. as shown. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts.9 Press Esc twice. Creating Annotations | 323 . 15 On the Options Bar. a return diffuser. Add leaders 10 Select the text box. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. 16 In the drawing area. and a segment of rectangular duct. verify that Leader is cleared. Use the leader segment grips to create horizontal leader segments from the text box. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. and then click Right Straight.

The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. verify that the Loaded Tag is Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. tag the remaining diffusers in the area. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. 22 In the Tags dialog. select Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. 21 In the Load Family dialog. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. click Load. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. for Ducts. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.rfa and Flex Duct Tag Round. 24 On the Options Bar. and click OK. If necessary. and click Open. 20 In the Tags dialog. clear Leader. 17 Click Modify. under Category.rfa. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .

open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. and Attached End. Leader. Creating Annotations | 325 . 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP.25 In the drawing area. 32 In the drawing area. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. 26 On the Options Bar. as shown. select Horizontal. and then press Esc. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 31 On the Options Bar.

select Free End. click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor. for Leader. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point to place the leader as shown. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . as shown. 34 In the drawing area.33 On the Options Bar.

39 In the Type Properties dialog. 40 Using the method learned previously. select Dot Open 1/16". Creating Dimensions In this exercise. you use temporary dimensions to locate. and lock lighting fixtures. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. Creating Dimensions | 327 . 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. That’s because you changed a type property. and all elements of that type are affected. lay out. 37 In the drawing area. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. select the last tag placed. for Leader Arrowhead. not simply an instance property. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style.36 Press Esc twice. and click OK. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well.

3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. click Training Files. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. 12 Press Esc. and then select the interior face of the wall. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. 5 Click to create a permanent dimension.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area.rvt. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. select the dimension line. On the Options Bar. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_i.

15 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.3 1/2"). the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. 16 Press Esc. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 17 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room.13 Using the same method. 19 Using the same methods. and offset them 8' from the wall. Creating a Legend | 329 . 18 Select the dimension value (7' . Creating a Legend In this exercise. and press Enter. annotation symbols. and notes. Lock dimensions between fixtures 14 Select the center dimension line. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. linework. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. click the 3 interior locks on the line. Because the dimensions are locked. enter 8'.

enter Diffuser Legend. select Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_i. click below the title to place the diffuser.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. ■ 9 In the drawing area.8 Neck. For Scale. Click OK. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. For View. 10 Using the same method. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.Sidewall : 18 x 8 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. and select 1/4" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. select Floor Plan. Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. click Training Files.rvt. select 1/4" = 1' -0".Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 . 5 Click in the drawing area.

and select 1/8" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. Creating a Legend | 331 . click next to the top diffuser. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment.11 Press Esc. 14 In the drawing area. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify.

RISE symbol for the copy start point. 26 Press Esc. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. The selected detail lines are now thin. 22 Zoom in to the copied component. select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE .Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror.DROP and its text note. 21 Press Esc. and then press Esc. 24 Select the component’s break line. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 27 While pressing Ctrl.

36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT. 35 Change the text on the right to N. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component.MECHANICAL LEGEND.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. 33 Click to the left of the left break line. Creating a Legend | 333 . 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and then click Modify. 34 Using the method learned previously. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet.30 Select Spot Elevation . and then click Modify. enter E.

40 Press Esc. click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .39 With the viewport still selected. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down.

rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_i. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. and text. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser . A detail callout that references another view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Detailing 15 In this lesson. click Training Files. A drafting view using detail components. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. indicating that it’s the active view. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. 335 . Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser.113 East elevation view. detail groups.

place Power Riser . 7 Drag the Power Riser .113 East on the sheet. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet. select each of the 2 panelboards. 4 On the Options Bar. and then modify and align the views.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Next.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . and click to place it. Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. 336 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 8 Using the same method. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. 5 In the drawing area. clear Leader.

enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. 13 Right-click. under Identity Data. 12 Select the Level 1 line. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. for Title on Sheet. and click Activate View. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. and click OK.9 Press Esc. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 337 . Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. giving the appearance of a single view. select the 113 North view. right-click. and click Deactivate View.

21 Using the drag control. and click Activate View. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. 19 Select the Level 1 line. Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. you add wiring to the diagram. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. right-click. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. select the 113 East elevation view. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. 22 Press Esc. right-click. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. as shown. In the next exercise.

Under Modify Subcategories. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_i. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . In the Line Styles dialog. for Name. notice that there are no snaps active.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. In the New Subcategory dialog.113 North view. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. verify that Chain is selected. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. 9 Beginning at the transformer. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. click New.rvt. click Training Files. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. for Line Weight. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. Creating Detail Wiring | 339 . Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). select 6. 2 Close the Project Browser. and click OK. indicating that it’s the active view. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. and then click OK. as shown. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . enter Electrical Power.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. expand Lines. 8 On the Options Bar. As you draw.

11 Using the same method. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . for Offset. 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). 13 On the Options Bar. enter 1/8".10 Press Esc. as shown.

18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. so that the result is as shown.15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . TIP When you use the Trim tool.

Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once. and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing .20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown.

29 Click Modify. The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. 28 Click above the cap. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). and select 3/32" Arial Transparent from the Type Selector drop-down. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown.22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. as shown. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader.

34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. 33 On the Options Bar. 35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints.31 While pressing Ctrl. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select Multiple. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. for Offset.36 Press Esc. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. and press Enter. 40 Press Esc. enter 3/32". 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. and then press Esc.5. enter 0 0. 42 On the Options Bar. You enter exact values for each line length. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. 39 Move the cursor to the right.

Notice that the new Ground group displays in the Project Browser. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. Using the same method. change the length of the bottom line to 0 0. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. enter Ground.44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. and then press Esc. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing . click on the length dimension value. for Name. 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. 47 In the drawing area. 50 With the group selected. expand Groups ➤ Detail. and press Enter.25. 46 In the Project Browser.125. select all 3 lines. enter 0 0. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. and click OK. while pressing Ctrl. you can ensure that they stay together. Press Esc.

draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. TP-2B. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . 52 Select the detail group. 54 Select the group. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar.51 Using the method learned previously. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer.

and click OK. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. for Name. 4 Right-click the ViewCube. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. 2 Right-click the copy. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and click Rename. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. In later exercises. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. and will place it on sheet E01. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport.rvt. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_i. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 5 Zoom in to view the section.

and then press Esc. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. 7 On the ViewCube. and then click the corner where the Top. Back. and Left sides converge.6 Select the section box. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . click Home.

350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. right-click. You hide this duct because it’s not part of the detail being created. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. Under Names. Hide elements in a view 10 Select the long rectangular duct at the rear. select 3D Views. and click Apply View Template. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. Walkthroughs. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. Click OK.Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 9 In the View Templates dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Show Type. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. select 3D HVAC Iso.

and click to specify the second leader point. Move the cursor down and to the left.14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: 18 Press Esc. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. as shown. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. Typical. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. label the connecting duct 8x8 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . 15 Using the same method. (Right). 19 Complete the text labels. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. and under Extents. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. select Crop Region Visible. 25 Click OK. and then click OK. under Extents. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. as shown. 23 Click on the crop region.To rotate and reposition a text label. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display.

rvt. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. Use detail lines to create a detail group. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. right-click the view name. 3 In the Project Browser. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. click Training Files. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. For Scale. Place a detail component. Click OK. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. select 3" = 1'-0". enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. and then select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.29 In the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_i. and click Properties. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. select the isometric view. Drafting Detail Components | 353 .

Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. select Documentation. for Sub-Discipline. as the rectangle start point. For View Classification. select Plumbing. and select Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . as shown. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 13 In the drawing area. 12 On the Element panel. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. 9 Zoom in to the component. 14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 1' 8" x 5 1/2". select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. Click OK. click the point at the top of the drain. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle).4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component.

5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck.15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. select C. Concrete. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. Drafting Detail Components | 355 . 20 Select 1. 22 Click Modify. 18 With the filled region still selected. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. (Line). 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region.I. for Type. 23 In the drawing area. and click OK. 21 In the drawing area. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. and then press Esc. select the filled region.P.

33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. 34 Press Esc. 31 On the Options Bar.28 Click Modify. 35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. 30 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select Multiple. and then click to select them. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines.

43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. as shown. (Rectangle).38 Pan to the other end of the slab. Drafting Detail Components | 357 . 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. and then press Esc. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. and then select the side of the slab above the line. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. 45 Using the method learned previously. Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 40 Click Finish Region. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring.

54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. for Name. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. and then click to select them.. and click OK. as shown. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 49 Click Modify. enter Flashing Membrane_F. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines.D. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . draw wide detail lines as shown. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group.Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. select the Flashing Membrane group. press Tab to highlight the chain. 52 In the Create Group dialog.

Drafting Detail Components | 359 . 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly.55 Press Esc. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. 58 Select Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. 61 Using the same method. as shown. add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location.

70 In the Keynotes dialog. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select Division 22 ➤ 22 13 00 ➤ 22 13 16 ➤ 22 13 16. and use the grips to resize the masking region. and then click OK. 71 Click Modify.A1 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. 72 If necessary. as shown. 64 Press Esc twice. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. select Leader and Free End. 67 On the Options Bar. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline.62 Press Esc twice. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object.

and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. 78 Move the cursor to the left. 76 To select the leader start point. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. 80 Press Esc twice.Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 4” Flange. and click to specify the second leader point. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). 81 Select the text note. and click to specify the text insertion point.

82 Continue annotating the detail. click to select the slab lines in the order indicated. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references. 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. 84 Using the following image as a guide. as shown.

Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser. select the view title. 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. Drafting Detail Components | 363 . and click to place it.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. 91 Close the file with or without saving it. 88 In the drawing area. and then press Esc twice. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet. open P103 . 90 Press Esc.

dwg. select Visible. 6 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. select Auto-Detect. select 3. For A-----NPP. select Black and White. 2 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Import CAD.rvt. For Import units. For Layers. click Training Files. 364 | Chapter 15 Detailing .Importing a CAD Drawing In this exercise. for Line Weight. Click OK. and select Roof Drain Overflow Imperial. Modify the CAD drawing line weight 5 Zoom to the left side of the detail. double-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Plumbing ➤ Drafting Views (Detail) ➤ Roof Drain Overflow Detail to make it the active view. For Colors. ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Type ZF to zoom the view. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_05_i. 7 On the Imported Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Import a CAD detail drawing 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Import CAD Formats dialog: ■ Navigate to Training\Imperial\06_Construction Documentation. expand Roof Drains Overflow Imperial. you import a CAD detail drawing. Click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and modify line weight properties in the imported drawing.

8 Type ZF. select the viewport title. 12 In the drawing area. 10 Drag Roof Drain Overflow Detail from the Project Browser to the upper right of the sheet. Importing a CAD Drawing | 365 . and then press Esc. 14 Drag the title to the small space below the viewport.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. open P103 . Place the detail on a sheet 9 In the Project Browser. 13 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. and select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 11 Press Esc.

366 .